2003 MDX Online Reference Owner’s Manual...

2003 MDX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.

Contents

Owner's Identification Form

Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... i

A Few Words About Safety .......................................................................................................................... ii

Important Handling Information .............................................................................................................iii

Your Vehicle at a Glance ...............................................................................................................................2

Driver and Passenger Safety .......................................................................................................................5 Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System.

Instruments and Controls...........................................................................................................................65 Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls.

Comfort and Convenience Features.......................................................................................................133 How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features.

Before Driving .............................................................................................................................................235 What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo.

Driving ...........................................................................................................................................................249 The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer.

Maintenance .................................................................................................................................................293 The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer.

Appearance Care.........................................................................................................................................351 Tips on cleaning and protecting your vehicle. Things to look for if your vehicle ever needs body repairs.

Taking Care of the Unexpected...............................................................................................................359 This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them.

Technical Information ...............................................................................................................................387 ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.

Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ......................................................................399 A summary of the warranties covering your new Acura, and how to contact us.

Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...............................................................................................................403 How to order manuals and other technical literature.

Index................................................................................................................................................................... I

Service Information Summary A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.

This Owner’s Manual should be considereda permanent part of the vehicle, and shouldremain with the vehicle when it is sold.

This Owner’s Manual covers all models ofthe MDX. You may find descriptions ofequipment and features that are not on yourparticular model.

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in effect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice andwithout incurring any obligation whatsoever.

Owner’s Identif ication

POUR CLIENTS CANADIENAVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avezbesoin d’un Manuel du Conducteuren français, veuillez demander àvotre concessionnaire decommander le numéro de pièce33S3V820

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Acura is to readthis manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.

Several warranties protect your new Acura. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manualhelps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your Acura dealer’sstaff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your Acura.Your Acura dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased toanswer any questions and concerns.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your Acura, otherproperty, or the environment.

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2003 Acura MDX was a wise investment.It will give you years of driving pleasure.

Introduction

WARNING:

i

－－

－－

－

－

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thisvehicle safely is an importantresponsibility.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

on the vehicle.

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

These signal words mean:

preceded by a safety alert symbol and one ofthree signal words: , , or .

such as Driver and Passenger Safety.how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

A Few Words About Safety

Safety LabelsSafety Messages

Safety SectionInstructions

Safety Headings

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

ii

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a highcenter of gravity. This means your vehicle can tip or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have asignificantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantlymore likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wearseat belts.

Your MDX has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higher groundclearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and roughterrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.

For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read ‘‘Driving Guidelines’’ on page of this manual and thesection on page . Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an

accident.285

250Off-Highway Guidelines

Important Handling Information

iii

Your Vehicle at a Glance

2

INDICATOR LIGHTS

POWER DOOR LOCKSWITCHES

MIRRORCONTROLS

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

FUEL FILL DOORRELEASE

PARKING BRAKEPEDAL

REAR A/C CONTROL ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

GLOVE BOX

AUDIO SYSTEM

CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEMSHIFT LEVER(P.67)GAUGES (P.74)

(P.93)

(P.116)

(P.111)

(P.238)

(P.237) (P.117)(P.143) (P.125)

(P.100)

(P.145, 163, 183)

(P.136)(P.254)

＊

＊

To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘A’’ logo.:

Your Vehicle at a Glance

3

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS

MOONROOFSWITCH

CRUISE CONTROL

FOG LIGHTS

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLS

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT

CRUISE CONTROL

HORN

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

LIGHT CONTROLSWITCH

HAZARD WARNINGLIGHTS

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGERVTM-4 LOCKINSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS

PASSENGER AIRBAGCUTOFF INDICATOR

VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST SYSTEMOFF SWITCH

(P.82)

(P.79/83)

(P.114)

(P.216)

(P.267)

(P.88)

(P.181) (P.89)(P.216) (P.83/87)

(P.128)

(P.87)

(P.58)

(P.88)(P.259)

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat beltsproperly. It explains your Supple-mental Restraint System. And it tellsyou how to properly restrain infantsand children in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 7

.......................................Seat Belts . 8...........................................Airbags . 9

.....................Seats & Seat-Backs . 10..........................Head Restraints . 10

..................................Door Locks . 10........Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 11

............................Protecting Adults . 12.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 12

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 12............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 13

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 145. Fasten and Position the Seat

.....................................Belts . 15....6. Adjust the Steering Wheel . 18

7. Maintain a Proper Sitting................................Position . 18

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 19...Additional Safety Precautions . 19

........................Protecting Children . 21All Children Must Be

...............................Restrained . 21Children Should Sit in the Back

...........................................Seat . 22The Passenger’s Front Airbag

Can Pose Serious Risks to...............................Children . 23

If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 25

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 25

...Additional Safety Precautions . 26General Guidelines for Using

...............................Child Seats . 27.......................Protecting Infants . 31

.........Protecting Small Children . 35.......Protecting Larger Children . 38

Using Child Seats with.....................................Tethers . 42

.............................Using LATCH . 44Additional Information About Your

.................................Seat Belts . 46..Seat Belt System Components . 46

......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 46Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 48...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 49

Additional Information About Your.....................................Airbags . 50

........................SRS Components . 50How Your Front Airbags

.........................................Work . 51...How Your Side Airbags Work . 55

How the SRS Indicator Light.......................................Works . 56

How The Side Airbag Cutoff...........Indicator Light Works . 57

How the Passenger Airbag..........Cutoff indicator Works . 58

.............................Airbag Service . 60...Additional Safety Precautions . 61

.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 62...................................Safety Labels . 63

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver and Passenger Safety 5

You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed the greater therisk, but serious accidents can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual. (See page

.)

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance. (See page .)

Children are safest when they areproperly restrained in a back seat,not the front seat. A child who is toosmall for a seat belt must be properlyrestrained in a child safety seat. (Seepage .)

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse withevery additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbagssupplement seat belts, but airbagsare designed to inflate only in amoderate to severe frontal collision.So even though your vehicle isequipped with airbags, make sureyou and your passengers alwayswear your seat belts, and wear themproperly. (See page .)15

9

21

296


Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards Control Your Speed

Keep Your Vehicle in SafeCondition

Restrain All Children

Don’t Drink and Drive

6

Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

These safety features are designedto reduce the severity of injuries in acrash. However, you and yourpassengers can’t take full advantageof these safety features unless youremain sitting in a proper positionand

In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

Some safety features do not requireany action on your part. Theseinclude a strong steel frameworkthat forms a safety cage around thepassenger compartment; front andrear crush zones that are designed tocrumple and absorb energy during acrash; a collapsible steering column;and seat belt tensioners thatautomatically tighten the front seatbelts in the event of a crash.


Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

always wear your seat beltsproperly.

7

(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zones(3) Seats & Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column(6) Seat Belts(7) Front Airbags(8) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(9) Door Locks(10) Side Airbags

(7)(10)

(9) (3) (1) (4)

(2)(6)(10)

(7) (8)(5)

(2)

Your seat belt system alsoincludes a light on the

instrument panel to remind you andyour passengers to fasten your seatbelts.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

For your safety, and the safety ofyour passengers, your vehicle isequipped with seat belts in all seatingpositions.

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including frontal,side, and rear impacts androllovers.

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag, andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Always wearyour seat belt, and make sure youwear it properly.


Seat Belts

Why Wear Seat Belts

What you should do:


8

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, evenif you have airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

To do their job, airbags mustinflate with tremendous force andspeed. So while airbags help savelives, they can cause minor injuries,or more serious or even fatalinjuries if occupants are notproperly restrained or sittingproperly.

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel ordashboard.

Your vehicle also has side airbags tohelp protect the upper torso of thedriver or a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe sideimpact.

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

Your vehicle has a SupplementalRestraint System (SRS) with dual-stage, dual-threshold front airbags tohelp protect the heads and chests ofthe driver and a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe frontalcollision.

Airbags



Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, rollovers, or minorfrontal or side collisions.

Airbags can pose serious hazards.

What you should do:

9

Head restraints can help protect youfrom whiplash and other injuries. Formaximum protection, the back ofyour head should rest against thecenter of the head restraint.

Reclining a seat-back too far reducesthe seat belt’s effectiveness andincreases the chance that the seat’soccupant will slide under the seatbelt in a crash and be seriouslyinjured.

Move the frontseats as far back as possible, andkeep adjustable seat-backs in anupright position whenever thevehicle is moving.

Your vehicle’s seats are designed tokeep you in a comfortable, uprightposition so you can take fulladvantage of the protection offeredby seat belts and the energyabsorbing materials in the seats.

How you adjust your seats and seat-backs can also affect your safety. Forexample, sitting too close to thesteering wheel or dashboardincreases the risk of you or yourpassenger being injured by strikingthe inside of the vehicle, or by aninflating airbag.

Keeping your doors locked reducesthe chance of being thrown out ofthe vehicle during a crash. It alsohelps prevent occupants fromaccidentally opening a door andfalling out, and outsiders fromunexpectedly opening your doors.


Seats & Seat-Backs

Head Restraints

Door Locks


What you should do:

10

To make sure you and yourpassengers get the maximumprotection from your vehicle’s safetyfeatures, check the following eachtime before you drive away:

All adults, and children who haveoutgrown child safety seats, arewearing their seat belts andwearing them properly (see page

).

Any infant or small child isproperly restrained in a child seatin a back seat (see page ).

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Remember, however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injuries ordeaths that can occur in severecrashes, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.

Front seat occupants are sittingupright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel anddashboard (see page ).

Seat-backs are upright (see page).

Head restraints are properlyadjusted (see page ).

All doors and the tailgate areclosed and locked (see page ).

All cargo is properly stored orsecured (see page ).

15

22

12

13

14

12

245



Pre-Drive Safety Checklist

11

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver and other adultoccupants.

These instructions also apply tochildren who have outgrown childseats and are large enough to wearlap/shoulder belts. (See page forimportant additional guidelines onhow to properly protect largerchildren.)

Your vehicle has a door and tailgatemonitor light on the instrumentpanel to indicate when a specificdoor or the tailgate is not tightlyclosed.

For security, locked doors canprevent an outsider fromunexpectedly opening a door whenyou come to a stop.

See page for how to lock thedoors.

For safety, locking the doors reducesthe chance that a passenger,especially a child, will open a doorwhile the vehicle is moving andaccidentally fall out. It also reducesthe chance of someone being thrownout of the vehicle during a crash.

After everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors andtailgate are closed and locked.

Any driver who sits too close to thesteering wheel is at risk of beingseriously injured or killed by strikingthe steering wheel or from beingstruck by an inflating front airbagduring a crash.

38

93


Protecting Adults

Introduction Adjust the Front Seats

Close and Lock the Doors1.

2.

12

CONTINUED

See page for how to adjust thefront seats.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make surethe seat is locked in position.

Most shorter drivers can get farenough away from the steeringwheel and still reach the pedals.However, if you are concerned aboutsitting too close, we recommend thatyou investigate whether some typeof adaptive equipment may help.

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel. If yousit too close to the steering wheel,you could be injured if the frontairbag inflates.

To reduce the chance of injury, wearyour seat belt properly, sit uprightwith your back against the seat, andmove the seat away from thesteering wheel to the farthestdistance that allows you to maintainfull control of the vehicle.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversadjust the seat so the center of thechest is at least 10 inches away fromthe center of the steering wheel. Inaddition to adjusting the seat, youcan adjust the steering wheel in andout (see page ).

Also make sure your front seatpassenger moves the seat as far tothe rear as possible.

89

101


Protecting Adults

Adjust the Seat-Backs3.

13

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

Before driving, make sure everyonewith an adjustable head restraint hasproperly positioned the headrestraint. The restraint should bepositioned so the back of theoccupant’s head rests against thecenter of the restraint. A tallerperson should adjust the restraint ashigh as possible.

See page for how to adjust seat-backs.

A front passenger should also adjustthe seat-back to an upright position,but as far from the dashboard aspossible. A passenger who sits tooclose to the dashboard could beinjured if the airbag inflates.

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

102


Protecting Adults

Adjust the Head Restraints4.

14

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position and sit wellback in the seat.

CONTINUED

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Also checkthat the belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

In the second row center seat andthe third row seats, be sure thedetachable anchors are also latched(see page ).

Check that the seat belt is nottwisted, because a twisted belt cancause serious injuries in a crash.105

109


Protecting Adults

Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

5.

15

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.

To adjust the height of a front seatbelt anchor, squeeze the two releasebuttons and slide the anchor up ordown as needed (it has fourpositions).

If necessary, pull up on the shoulderbelt again to remove any slack fromthe shoulder belt, then check thatthe belt rests across the center ofyour chest and over your shoulder.This spreads the forces of a crashover the strongest bones in yourupper body.


Protecting Adults

16

RELEASEBUTTON

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

If a seat belt does not seem to workas it should, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

Anyone using a seat belt that isnot working properly can beseriously injured or killed. Have yourAcura dealer check the belt as soonas possible.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsystem and how to take care of yourbelts.

46

Protecting Adults


Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

No one shouldsit in a seat with an inoperative seatbelt.

17

Adjust the steering wheel, if needed,so that the wheel points toward yourchest, not toward your face.

Pointing the steering wheel towardyour chest provides optimalprotection from the airbag.

See page for how to adjust thesteering wheel.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and put on seat belts, it isvery important that they continue tosit upright, well back in their seats,with their feet on the floor, until thevehicle is parked and the engine isoff.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured bystriking interior parts of the vehicle,or by being struck by an inflatingfront airbag. Being struck by aninflating side airbag can result inpossibly serious injuries.

Remember, to get the bestprotection from your vehicle’sairbags and other safety features,you must sit properly and wear yourseat belt properly.

89

Adjust the Steering Wheel Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

6. 7.

Protecting Adults

Driver and Passenger Safety18

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

Pregnant women should also situpright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel ordashboard. This will reduce the riskof injuries to both the mother andher unborn child that can be causedby a crash or an inflating airbag.

Each time you have a check-up, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.

Because protecting the mother is thebest way to protect her unborn child,a pregnant woman should alwayswear a seat belt whenever she drivesor rides in a vehicle.

Remember to keep the lap portion ofthe belt as low as possible acrossyour hips.

All passengersmust sit in locked, upright seatsand be properly restrained by seatbelts.

A passenger who is notwearing a seat belt during a crashor emergency stop can be thrownagainst the inside of the vehicle,against other occupants, or out ofthe vehicle.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

CONTINUED

Advice for Pregnant Women Additional Safety PrecautionsNever let passengers ride in thecargo area or on top of a folded-down back seat.

Passengers should not stand up orchange seats while the vehicle ismoving.

Two people should never use thesame seat belt.

Protecting Adults


Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canseverely compromise theprotective capability of the seatbelt and increase the chance ofserious injury in a crash.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp objects inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

If a side airbaginflates, a cup holder or other hardobject attached on or near thedoor could be propelled inside thecar and hurt someone.

If yourhands or arms are close to theairbag covers in the center of thesteering wheel and on top of thedashboard, they could be injured ifthe airbags inflate.

Any objectattached to or placed on the coversmarked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’ in thecenter of the steering wheel andon top of the dashboard couldinterfere with the proper operationof the airbags. Or, if the airbagsinflate, the objects could bepropelled inside the car and hurtsomeone.

This could make the driver’s seatposition sensor or the frontpassenger’s seat weight sensorsineffective.

This could causeproblems with the driver’s seatposition sensor or the frontpassenger’s seat weight sensors.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a front door.

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Do not modify the front seats.

Do not place any items under thefront seats.

Protecting Adults


Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many parents and otheradults may not know how toprotect young passengers. (See page

.)So if you have children, or if you everneed to drive with a grandchild orother children in your vehicle, besure to read this section.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian province requires thatinfants and children be restrainedwhenever they ride in a vehicle.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof death of children ages 12 andunder.

(See page .)38

27

properly

All Children Must Be Restrained

Any child who is too small to wear aseat belt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat.

A larger child should always berestrained with a seat belt, and use abooster, if needed.

Protecting Children


Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt.

According to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in theback seat, not the front seat. TheNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenages 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat.

In a back seat, children are lesslikely to be injured by striking hardinterior parts during a collision orhard braking. Also, children cannotbe injured by an inflating airbagwhen they ride in the back.During a

crash, the belt could press deepinto the child and cause veryserious injuries.

If you are not wearing aseat belt in a crash, you could bethrown forward into thedashboard and crush the child.

If you are wearing a seat belt, thechild can be torn from your armsduring a crash. For example, ifyour vehicle crashes into a parkedvehicle at 30 mph (48 km/h), a20-lb (9 kg) infant will become a600-lb (275 kg) force, and you willnot be able to hold on.

Children Should Sit in the BackSeat

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand an infant or child.

Additional Precautions to ParentsNever hold an infant or child onyour lap.

Protecting Children


Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it can inflate with enoughforce to cause very serious injuries.

With an advanced airbag system, thefront passenger’s airbag is turned offif sensors detect a total weight ofless than about 65 lbs (30 kg) in theseat, and the ‘‘Passenger AirbagCutoff’’ indicator is turned on. (Seepage for additional information onhow the passenger’s airbag works.)

Even if the passenger’s front airbagis turned off, we stronglyrecommend that infants, smallchildren, and larger children rideproperly restrained in a back seatwhere they will be safer.

To help prevent airbag-causeddeaths and injuries to children, thisvehicle has an advanced airbagsystem.

58

The Passenger’s Front AirbagCan Pose Serious Risks

Protecting Children


To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin a back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the dashboard andon the driver’s and front passenger’svisors. Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

To remind you of the front airbaghazards, your vehicle has warninglabels on the driver’s and frontpassenger’s visors. Please read andfollow the instructions on theselabels.

U.S. Models Canadian Models

Protecting Children


Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Your vehicle has two rows of backseats where children can be properlyrestrained.

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear a seat beltproperly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

If you ever have to carry a group ofchildren (when carpooling forexample), and a child must ride infront:

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards fromthe passenger’s front airbag, andpaying close attention to a childdistracts the driver from theimportant tasks of driving, placingboth of you at risk.

If a child requires physical attentionor frequent visual contact, westrongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in a backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.

12

15

38

18

If a Child Requires CloseAttention

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren

Protecting Children


Using this feature willprevent children from opening thedoors and accidentally falling out(see page ).

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous. Forexample, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Andchildren left alone with the key inthe ignition can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.

Children who play in vehicles canaccidentally get trapped inside thevehicle. Teach your children not toplay in or around vehicles.

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignition,and open the tailgate, which canlead to accidental injury or death.

Usingthis feature will prevent childrenfrom playing with the windows,which could expose them tohazards or distract the driver (seepage ).

99

111

Additional Safety PrecautionsUse childproof door locks toprevent children from opening thedoors.

Do not leave children alone in yourvehicle.

Lock all doors and the tailgatewhen your vehicle is not in use.

Keep vehicle keys and remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.

Use the main power windowswitch to prevent children fromopening the rear windows.

Protecting Children


The following pages give generalguidelines for selecting and installingchild seats for infants and smallchildren.

To provide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

The child seat shouldmeet Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard 213 (FMVSS 213)or Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213 (CMVSS 213). Lookfor the manufacturer’s statementof compliance on the box and seat.

Children up to about oneyear old should be restrained in arear-facing, reclining child seat. Onlya rear-facing seat provides theproper support to protect an infant’shead, neck, and back. See page

for additional information onprotecting infants.

A child who is toolarge for a rear-facing child seat, andwho can sit up without support,should be restrained in a forward-facing child seat. See page foradditional information on protectingsmall children.

35

31

CONTINUED

General Guidelines for UsingChild Seats

Selecting a Child Seat

The child seat should meet safetystandards.

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

Infants: Small Children:1.

2.

Protecting Children


Due to variations in the design ofchild seats, vehicle seats, and seatbelts, all child seats will not fit allvehicle seating positions.

However, Acura is confident that oneor more child seat models can fit andbe properly installed in allrecommended seating positions inyour vehicle.

Before purchasing a child seat, werecommend that parents test thechild seat in the specific vehicleseating position (or positions) wherethey intend to use the seat. If apreviously purchased child seat doesnot fit, you may need to buy adifferent one that will fit.

Your vehicle has lower anchorsinstalled for use with LATCH(Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren) - compatible child seats.For more information, see page .44

The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

3.

Protecting Children


A small child in a forward-facingchild seat is also at risk. If thevehicle seat is too far forward,or the child’s head is thrownforward during a collision, aninflating airbag can kill orseriously injure the child.

If a small child must ride in thefront, follow the instructionsprovided in this section.

This page briefly summarizes Acura’srecommendations on where to placerear-facing and forward-facing childseats in your vehicle.

The passenger’s front airbaginflates with enough force to killor seriously injure an infant in arear-facing child seat.

Recommended positions.Properly secure a rear-facing childseat (see page ).

Recommendedpositions. Properly secure a front-facing child seat (see page ).

Never in the front seat, dueto the front airbag hazard.

Not recommended,due to the front airbag hazard. If asmall child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position and secure a front-facing child seat with the seat belt(see page ).

36

36

32

CONTINUED

Placing a Child Seat Front Passenger’s Seat

Back SeatsInfants:

Small children:

Infants:

Small children:

Airbags Pose SeriousRisks to Children

Protecting Children


After selecting a proper child seat,and a good position to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be thrown out of the seat in acrash and be seriously injured.

However, a child seat does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ In some vehiclesor seating positions, it may bedifficult to install a child seat so thatit does not move at all. Some side-to-side or back-and-forth movement canbe expected and should not reducethe child seat’s effectiveness.

When you are not using a child seat,either remove it and store it in a safeplace, or make sure it is properlysecured. An unsecured child seat canbe thrown around the vehicle duringa crash or sudden stop and injuresomeone.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly securedin the desired seating position.

To provide security during normaldriving maneuvers as well as duringa collision, we recommend thatparents secure a child seat as firmlyas possible.

All child seats aredesigned to be secured to thevehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. Some child seatscan be secured to the vehicle’sLATCH anchorage system instead.A child whose seat is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash. See pages

, and for instructions onhow to properly secure child seatsin this vehicle.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure.

443632

Installing a Child Seat Secure the child in the child seat.

Storing a Child Seat

Properly secure the child seat tothe vehicle.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

1.

2.

3.

Protecting Children


Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

We strongly recommend placing arear-facing child seat in a back seat,not the front. Even with advancedairbags, which can automaticallyturn the passenger’s front airbag off(see page ), a back seat is thesafest place for an infant.

If an infant must be closely watched,have another adult sit in a back seatnext to the baby.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

We recommend that an infant berestrained in a rear-facing child seatuntil the infant is at least one yearold, reaches the seat maker’s weightor height limit, and is able to sit upwithout support.

58

CONTINUED

Protecting Infants

Child Seat Type

Child Seat Placement

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Protecting Children


Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death during acollision.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

The following pages provideinstructions on how to secure a rear-facing child seat with this type ofseat belt.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor (you might hear aclicking noise as the belt retracts).

With the child seat in the desiredback seating position, route thebelt through the child seataccording to the seat maker’sinstructions, then insert the latchplate into the buckle.

The lap/shoulder belts in the backseats have a locking mechanism thatmust be activated to secure a childseat.

If you have a child seat designedto attach to the vehicle’s LATCHanchorage system, follow theinstructions on page .

Before installing a child seat in thecenter seat of the second row oreither of the third row seats, makesure the seat belt detachableanchor is latched (see page ).

1.

2. 3.

44

109

Installing a Rear-Facing Child Seatwith a Lap/Shoulder Belt

Protecting Children


Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat, whilepulling up on the belt.

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked andyou will need to repeat these steps.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism and remove a child seat,unlatch the buckle, unroute the seatbelt, and let the belt fully retract.

4.

5. 6.

Protecting Children


For proper protection, an infant mustride in a reclined, or semi-reclinedposition. To determine the properreclining angle, check with the baby’sdoctor or follow the seat maker’srecommendations.

To achieve the desired recliningangle, it may help to put a rolled uptowel under the toe of the child seat,as shown.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front-seat passenger frommoving the seat as far back asrecommended (see page ). Or itmay prevent them from locking theseat-back in the desired uprightposition (see page ).

In either case, we recommend thatyou place the child seat in anotherback seating position, or leave theaffected seat unoccupied. If theproblem cannot be solved, you maywish to get a smaller rear-facingchild seat.

12

13

Rear-Facing Child Seat InstallationTips

Protecting Children


We also recommend that a smallchild stay in the child seat as long aspossible, until the child reaches theweight or height limit for the seat.

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

A child at least one year old who cansit up without support, and who fitswithin the child seat maker’s weightand height limits, should berestrained in a forward-facing,upright child seat.

We strongly recommend placing aforward-facing child seat in a backseat, not the front. Even withadvanced airbags, which canautomatically turn the passenger’sfront airbag off (see page ), aback seat is the safest place for asmall child.

If an child must be closely watched,have another adult sit in a back seatnext to the child.

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the vehicle, and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.

58

CONTINUED

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type

Child Seat Placement

Protecting Children


The lap/shoulder belts in the outerback and front passenger seatingpositions have a locking mechanismthat must be activated to secure achild seat.

The following pages provideinstructions on how to secure aforward-facing child seat with thistype of seat belt.

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle.

If you have a child seat designedto attach to the vehicle’sLATCH anchorage system,follow the instructions on page

.

Before installing a child seat in thecenter seat of the second row oreither of the third row seats, makesure the seat belt detachableanchor is latched (see page ).

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the vehicle, and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.

1.

2.

44

109

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Belt

Protecting Children


Improperly placing a forward-facing child seat in the frontseat can result in serious injuryor death if the front airbagsinflate.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible and properly restrainthe child.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure. Itmay help to put weight on thechild seat, or push on the back ofthe seat, while pulling up on thebelt.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor (you might hear aclicking noise as the belt retracts).

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked andyou will need to repeat these steps.

3.

4.

5. 6.

CONTINUED

Protecting Children


To deactivate the lockingmechanism in order to remove achild seat, unlatch the buckle,unroute the seat belt, and let the beltfully retract.

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in the back seat on abooster and wear a lap/shoulder belt.

We recommend that the child use abooster seat until the child is tallenough to use the seat belt without abooster.

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in the front seat.

Protecting Larger Children

Protecting Children


Allowing a larger child to sitimproperly in the front seat canresult in injury or death if thepassenger’s front airbag inflates.

If a larger child must sit in front,make sure the child moves theseat as far back as possible,uses a booster seat if needed,and wears the seat belt properly.

CONTINUED

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childsit in a rear seat, all the way backagainst the seat, and put on the seatbelt. Follow the instructions on page

. Then check how the belt fits.

However, if the shoulder belttouches or crosses the child’s neck,or if the lap belt crosses the child’sstomach, the child needs to use abooster seat.

This could result in serious neck andinternal injuries during a crash.

If they do, they couldbe very seriously injured in a crash.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt, severelycompromise the protective capabilityof the seat belt and increase thechance of serious injury in a crash.

This could causevery serious injuries during a crash.It also increases the chance that thechild will slide under the belt in acrash and be injured.

If the shoulder part of the belt restsover the child’s collarbone andagainst the center of the chest, andthe lap belt rests over the child’shipbones and touches the tops oftheir thighs as shown, the child isprobably big enough to wear the seatbelt.

15

Checking Seat Belt Fit Do not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck or over the stomach.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on a seatbelt.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the back orunder the arm.

Protecting Children


We strongly recommend that a childwho used a booster ride in a backseat, not the front. Even if thepassenger’s front airbag is off, aback seat is the safest place for thechild.

Whichever style you select, followthe booster seat maker’s instructions.

If a child who uses a booster mustride in front, move the vehicle seatas far to the rear as possible, and besure the child is wearing the seatbelt properly.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenages 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat.

The side airbag also poses risks. Ifany part of a larger child’s body is inthe path of a deploying airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

If the passenger’s front airbag is on,and it inflates in a moderate tosevere frontal collision, the airbagcan cause serious injuries to a childwho is unrestrained, improperlyrestrained, sitting too close to theairbag, or out of position.

Even with advanced front airbags,the back seat is the safest place for achild of any age or size.

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of the ears areeven with the top of the seat-back. Achild of this height should be tallenough to use the lap/shoulder beltwithout a booster.

Even then, the child may still need touse a booster seat. Note that somestates now require children to useboosters until they reach a certainage and/or weight. Be sure to checkcurrent laws in the state or stateswhere you intend to drive.

Using a Booster Seat When Can a Larger Child Sit in Front

Protecting Children


If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manualand make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly positioned and secured.

Remind the child not to leantoward the door because of theside airbag.

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit over the hips, chest, andshoulder (see pages and ). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,the child should not sit in the front.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in thefront, there are other importantfactors you should consider. 15 39

Protecting Children


Physical Size

Maturity

41

Your vehicle has attachment pointsfor a tether-style child seat to beinstalled on the second or third rowas shown.

There are two anchorage points onthe tailgate sill. Select the anchoragepoint you want to use, and removethe cover with a small flat-tippedscrewdriver or fingernail file.

Each second row seat has a tetheranchorage point behind the seatback.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable. (Tethers are required inCanada.)

Second Seat Installation: Third Seat Installation:Using Child Seats with Tethers

Protecting Children


TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT

Lift the head restraint, then routethe tether strap over the seat-backbetween the legs of the headrestraint.

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether attachment point, and tightenthe strap according to the child seatmaker’s instructions. Make sure thestrap is not twisted.

Protecting Children


Put the child seat in a second rowvehicle seat and attach the childseat to the lower anchorsaccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions.

Your vehicle is equipped withLATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for Children) at the secondrow seats. The lower anchors arelocated between the seat-back andseat bottom and are to be used onlywith a child seat designed for usewith LATCH.

Move the seat belt buckle or seatbelt tongue away from the loweranchors.

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat:

Make sure there are no foreignobjects around the anchors.Foreign objects could get in theway of a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.

The exact location of each loweranchorage is marked with a smallbutton above the lower anchoragepoint.

1.

2.

3.

Using LATCH

Protecting Children


RIGID TYPE

MARKS

LOWERANCHORS

Follow the child seat maker’sinstructions for any additionaladvice on adjusting or tighteningthe fit.

Attach the attaching clip to thetether anchor fitting and tightenthe strap according to the childseat maker’s instructions. Makesure the strap is not twisted.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers.

This symbol on rear or forwardfacing child seats or boostercushions indicates the presence ofLATCH compatible hardware.

4. 5.

6.

Protecting Children


Lower Universal AnchorageSystem Symbol

45

FLEXIBLE TYPE

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all seven seatingpositions. The front seat belts arealso equipped with automatic seatbelt tensioners.

The seat belt system alsoincludes a light on the

instrument panel to remind you andyour passengers to fasten your belts.If the driver’s seat belt is notfastened before the ignition is turnedON (II), the light will come on and abeeper will also sound. The beeperwill stop after a few seconds, but thelight will stay on until the driver’sseat belt is fastened.

The lap/shoulder belts in the centerseat of the second row and both ofthe third row seats are equipped witha detachable anchor that has twoparts: a small latch plate and abuckle.

The detachable anchor shouldnormally be latched whenever theseats-backs are in an upright position.For more information about thedetachable anchors, see page .

The lap/shoulder belts goes overyour shoulder, across your chest,and across your hips.

109

Seat Belt System Components Lap/Shoulder Belt

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts


The seat belts in all seating positionsexcept the driver’s have an additionallocking mechanism that must beactivated to secure a child seat. (Seepages and for instructions onhow to secure child seats with thistype of seat belt.)

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockingmechanism will activate. The beltwill retract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism, unlatch the buckle andlet the seat belt fully retract. Torefasten the belt, pull it out only asfar as needed.

See page for instructions on howto wear the lap/shoulder beltproperly.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched.

To unlock the belt, push the redPRESS button on the buckle.Guide the belt across your body sothat it retracts completely. Afterexiting the vehicle, be sure the beltis out of the way and will not getclosed in the door.

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body. 15

3632



If your airbags inflate, the tensionersimmediately tighten the front seatbelts to help hold the occupants inplace. The belts will remain tightuntil you unbuckle them in thenormal way.

The SRS indicator light willcome on if there is a

problem with your automatic seatbelt tensioners (see page ).

Your Acura has automatic seat belttensioners for added protectionduring a moderate to severe frontalcollision.

56

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners



48

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthat the lap/shoulder belts retracteasily. Any belt not in good conditionor not working properly will notprovide good protection and shouldbe replaced as soon as possible.

For information on how to clean yourseat belts, see page .

Automatic seat belt tensioners thatdeployed during a crash must bereplaced.

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by the dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed.

Acura provides a lifetime warrantyon seat belts. Acura will repair orreplace any seat belt component thatfails to function properly duringnormal use. Please see your

booklet fordetails.

355

AcuraWarranty Information

Seat Belt Maintenance



U.S. Models

49

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

Your Supplemental Restraint System(SRS) includes:

Automatic seat belt tensioners(see page ).

Two front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG.’’

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe frontalcollision.

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, and driver andpassenger seat belt use when theignition is ON (II).

48

SRS Components

Additional Information About Your Airbags


(5)(8)

(3)

(7)

(4)

(4)

(6)

(5)(7)

(2)

(9)(9)

(10)(8)(1)

(1) Driver’s Airbag(2) Front Passenger’s Airbag(3) Control Unit(4) Seat Belt Tensioners(5) Side Airbags(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors(8) Front Sensor(9) Side Impact Sensors(10) Passenger Airbag Cutoff Indicator

CONTINUED

An indicator light on theinstrument panel that alerts you toa possible problem with thesystem (see page ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

Your vehicle is equipped with dual-stage, dual-threshold airbags to helpreduce the chance of airbag-causedinjuries.

A driver’s seat position sensor thatmonitors the driver’s seat positionand adjusts the inflation andtiming of the driver’s airbag (seepage ).

Front passenger’s weight sensorsmonitor the weight on the seat.These prevent the passenger’sairbag from inflating if the weightis less than about 65 lbs (30 kg)(see page ).

53

54

56

How Your Front Airbags Work



After inflating, the front airbagsimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

The total time for inflation anddeflation is approximately one-tenthof a second, so fast that mostoccupants are not aware that theairbags deployed until they see themlying in their laps.

Since both airbags use the samesensors, both airbags normallyinflate at the same time. However, itis possible for only one airbag toinflate.

This can occur when the severity ofa collision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

During a frontal crash, your seatbelts help restrain your lower bodyand torso. Your airbag provides acushion to help restrain and protectyour head and chest.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, the sensorswill detect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration. If the rate ofdeceleration is high enough, thecontrol unit will instantly inflate thefront airbags.



After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.

Your vehicle has a driver’s seatposition sensor as a part of theadvanced airbag system. The sensoris located on the inside of the leftseat rail under the driver’s seat. Thissensor monitors the driver’s seatsliding position and sends theinformation to control unit. Thecontrol unit will control adequateinflation and timing of the driver’sairbag.

Do not put any cargo or metalobjects under the driver’s seat, anddo not cover the sensor withanything, including the rear seatpassenger’s feet.This will cause the sensor to workimproperly and will damage it.

If there is a problem in the sensor,the SRS indicator in the instrumentpanel comes on. In this case, thedriver’s airbag will inflate normallyduring a crash regardless of thedriver’s seating position.

CONTINUED



Driver’s Seat Position Sensor

53

Your vehicle has front passenger’sweight sensors as part of theadvanced airbag system. They arelocated under both of the frontpassenger’s seat rails. These sensorsmonitor the weight on the seat at theseat cushion, seat-back, seat-backpocket, and seat rails.

If the total weight on the seat isabout 65 lbs (30 kg) or less, thesystem shuts off the front passenger’sairbag and the passenger airbagcutoff indicator comes on. It remindsyou that the front passenger’s airbagwill not inflate during a crash.

If there is no passenger in the frontpassenger’s seat, the passengerairbag cutoff indicator does notcome on, however the system shutsoff the front passenger’s airbag.

The driver’s and front passenger’sseat sensors may not work properlyif:

For additional information on howyour airbags work, see the booklettitled

that came with yourowner’s manual.

For additional information on howyour airbags work, ask your dealerfor a copy of the booklet titled

You do not wear your seat beltproperly.

You do not sit upright and as farback as possible from the steeringwheel or the dashboard (see page

).

You do not secure the child seatproperly, and move the front seatas far back as possible.

Be careful not to spill any liquids.Spilled liquids could damage thesensors under the front seats.

If your vehicle sustains a severeimpact, have the driver’s seatposition sensor and the frontpassenger’s weight sensorsinspected by your Honda dealer.

18

SRS: What You Need to KnowAbout Airbags

SRS:What You Need to Know About Airbags.



Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors

Canadian Owners

U.S. Owners

54

Your vehicle is equipped with sideairbags for the driver and a frontseat passenger. The airbags arestored in the outer edges of the frontseat-backs, and both are marked‘‘SIDE AIRBAG.’’

If you ever have a moderate tosevere side impact, the sensors willdetect rapid deceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag.

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

How Your Side Airbags Work



If the light comes on at any othertime, or does not come on at all, youshould have the system checked byyour dealer. For example:

If the SRS indicator light does notcome on after you turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II).

If the light stays on after theengine starts.

If the light comes on or flashes onand off while you drive.

The SRS indicator lightalerts you to a potential

problem with your front airbags andautomatic seat belt tensioners.

This light will also alert you to apotential problem with your sideairbags, passenger’s side airbagautomatic cutoff system (see page

), or the driver’s seat positionsensor and the front passenger’sweight sensors (see pages and

).

When you turn the ignition ON (II),this indicator will light briefly thengo out. This tells you that the systemis working properly.

If you see any of these indications,your front or side airbags may notdeploy, your passenger’s side airbagautomatic cutoff system may notwork properly, your seat belttensioners may not work, or thesensors under the front seats maynot work properly when you needthem. See your Acura dealer as soonas possible.

57

57

58

How the SRS Indicator LightWorks



Ignoring the SRS indicator lightcan result in serious injury ordeath if the airbags, cutoffsystem, or tensioners do notwork properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS light alerts you to apotential problem.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), the indicator should lightbriefly and go out (see page ). If itdoesn’t light, stays on, or comes onwhile driving without a passenger inthe front seat, have the systemchecked.

If a small-statured adult leanssideways, or larger adult slouchesand leans sideways into thedeployment path of the side airbag,the system may also shut off the sideairbag.

This light alerts you thatthe passenger’s side airbag

has been automatically shut off.

It does not mean there is a problemwith your side airbags. It means thatthe side airbag cutoff system hasactivated to prevent the side airbagfrom deploying.

If the side airbag cutoff indicatorlight comes on, you should have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the deploymentpath of the side airbag, the systemwill turn the airbag back on and thelight will go out.

To reduce the risk of injury from aninflating side airbag, your vehicle hasan automatic cutoff system for thepassenger’s side airbag.

Although Acura does not encouragechildren to ride in the front, thissystem is designed to shut off theside airbag if a child leans sidewaysand the child’s head is in the sideairbag deployment path.

68

How the Side Airbag CutoffIndicator Light Works



This light alerts you that the frontpassenger’s airbag is shut off.

If the light is on, it does not meanthere is a problem with the frontpassenger’s airbag. If there is aproblem in the weight sensors, theSRS indicator in the instrumentpanel comes on. In this case, thepassenger airbag cutoff indicatorturns off, and the front passenger’sairbag will inflate during a crash.

To reduce the chance of airbag-caused injuries, the system shuts offthe front passenger’s airbag whenthe total weight on the frontpassenger’s seat is about 65 lbs(30 kg) or less. The passengerairbag cutoff indicator comes on toremind you the front passenger’sairbag will not inflate during a crash.

If there is no passenger in the frontpassenger’s seat, this indicator doesnot come on, however the systemshuts off the front passenger’sairbag.

If this indicator comes on with nopassenger in the front passenger’sseat, or with an adult in the seat,there may be a problem in theadvanced airbag system. Have thevehicle checked by the dealer assoon as possible.

This indicator may come on or offrepeatedly, if some objects are puton the front passenger’s seat, or ifthe temperature of the vehicle’sinterior changes suddenly when adoor is opened.



How the Passenger Airbag CutoffIndicator Works

58

PASSENGER AIRBAG CUTOFFINDICATOR

To ensure the front passenger’s seatweight sensors keep the passenger’sairbag activated when an adult orlarge child weighing about 65 lbs/30 kg or more sits in the frontpassenger’s seat, do not allowanything to decrease the weight onthe seat. This includes, but is notlimited to, these examples:

Rear passengers pushing up thefront passenger’s seat with theirfeet.

Front passenger’s seat forciblypushed up by luggage or otheritems placed under it.

Front passenger’s seat forciblymoved backward into luggage orother items placed behind it.

If a passenger is tall enough to usethe seat belt and sit properly, but thepassenger airbag cutoff indicatorcomes on and off repeatedly, werecommend that the passenger sitsin a rear seat. If the passenger mustsit on the front seat, move the seatas far to the rear as possible, havethe passenger sit upright, and makesure the seat belt is worn securely.

To ensure the front passenger’s seatweight sensors keep the passenger’sairbag deactivated when an infant orsmall child weighing about 65 lbs/30 kg or less sits in the frontpassenger’s seat, do not allowanything to increase the weight onthe seat. This includes, but is notlimited to, these examples:

Rear passengers pushing orpulling the front passenger’s seat-back or pushing the seat rails withtheir feet.

Heavy items placed in the frontpassenger’s seat-back pocket.

CONTINUED



If the passenger airbag cutoffindicator does not light, or comes onand off repeatedly while a child seatis secured on the front passenger’sseat, remove the child seat, thensecure it on a rear seat.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), the passenger airbag cutoffindicator will light briefly then go out.This tells you that the system isworking properly.

The indicator may come on or off afew seconds later if the weight onthe front passenger’s seat changes.

Your front and side airbag systemsare virtually maintenance-free, andthere are no parts you can safelyservice. However, you must haveyour vehicle serviced if:

Anyairbag that has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit, automatic seat belttensioners and other related parts.Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by an Acura dealer or aknowledgeable body shop.

Take your vehicle toan authorized Acura dealer assoon as possible. If you ignore thisindication, the airbags might notinflate when you need them.



Airbag Service

Your airbags ever inflate.

The SRS indicator light alerts youto a problem.

60

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

If rain or spilled watersoaks into a seat-back, it canprevent the side airbag systemfrom working properly.

Improperlyreplacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your sideairbags from inflating during acollision.

This could make thedriver’s seat position sensor andthe front passenger’s weightsensors ineffective.

See page for further informationand precautions relating to yourairbags.

This could make the driver’s seatposition sensor and the frontpassenger’s weight sensorsineffective.

first contact AcuraClient Services at 800-382-2238.

244



Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

Do not expose the front seat-backsto water.

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consulting anAcura dealer.

Do not place any items under thefront seats.

Do not modify the front seats.

If it is necessary to modify anadvanced front airbag system toaccommodate a person withdisabilities,

61

Your vehicle’s exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. You shouldhave no problem with carbonmonoxide entering the vehicle innormal driving if you maintain yourvehicle properly.Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.The vehicle was in an accidentthat may have damaged the under-side.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

With the tailgate open, air flow canpull exhaust gas into your vehicle’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetailgate open, open all the windowsand set the heating and coolingsystem/climate control system asshown below.

Select the Fresh Air mode.Select the mode.Turn the fan on high speed.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

If you must sit in your parked vehicle,even in an unconfined area, with theengine running, adjust the heatingand cooling system/climate controlsystem as follows:

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard


Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury. Read these labels carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read, contact your Acura dealerfor a replacement.

U.S. models only U.S. models

Canadian models

Safety Labels


RADIATOR CAP

SUN VISOR

HOOD

DASHBOARD

BATTERY LABEL

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour Acura. All the essential controlsare within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 66...............................Indicator Lights . 67

.............................................Gauges . 74Controls Near the Steering

.......................................Wheel . 78...................................Headlights . 79

....................Automatic Lighting . 80Automatic Lighting Off

.....................................Feature . 81............Daytime Running Lights . 82

....Instrument Panel Brightness . 82................................Turn Signals . 83

.....................Windshield Wipers . 83..................Windshield Washers . 87

Rear Window Wiper and.....................................Washer . 87

..........................Hazard Warning . 87.............Rear Window Defogger . 88

.....................................Fog Light . 88......Steering Wheel Adjustment . 89

...............................Keys and Locks . 90..............................................Keys . 90

....................Immobilizer System . 91............................Ignition Switch . 92

......................Power Door Locks . 93...................Remote Transmitter . 95

..............Childproof Door Locks . 99........................................Tailgate . 99

..................................Glove Box . 100...............................................Seats . 101

..........Power Seat Adjustments . 101.........Driver’s Lumbar Support . 102

........Manual Seat Adjustments . 103Second and Third Row seat

..........................Adjustments . 104........................Head Restraints . 105......................Rear Seat Access . 106

..........Folding the Second Seat . 106.............Folding the Third Seat . 107

.................Detachable Anchors . 109..................................Seat Heaters . 110

............................Power Windows . 111.......................................Moonroof . 114

...........................................Mirrors . 115...............................Parking Brake . 117

Driving Position Memory........................................System . 118

...........................Beverage Holder . 121.................Console Compartment . 123

.......................Rear Compartment . 123.................................Cargo Hooks . 123

........................Sunglasses Holder . 124........................................Sun Visor . 124

................................Vanity Mirror . 125............Accessory Power Sockets . 125

........................................Coin Box . 127......................................Coat Hook . 127

...............................Interior Lights . 128

Instruments and Controls

Instruments and Controls 65

Control Locations

Instruments and Controls66

MIRRORCONTROLS

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

PARKING BRAKEPEDAL

REAR A/C CONTROL ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

GLOVE BOX

AUDIO SYSTEM

CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEMSHIFT LEVERINDICATOR LIGHTSGAUGES

POWER DOOR LOCKSWITCHES

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

FUEL FILL DOORRELEASE

(P.67)(P.74)

(P.93)

(P.116)

(P.111)

(P.238)

(P.237) (P.117)(P.143) (P.125)

(P.100)

(P.145, 163, 183)

(P.136)(P.254)

＊

＊

＊

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.CONTINUED

Indicator Lights


VEHICLE STABILITY ASSISTSYSTEM (VSA) INDICATOR

MALFUNCTION INDICATORLAMP

LOW OIL PRESSUREINDICATOR

CHARGING SYSTEMINDICATOR

A/T TEMPERATUREINDICATOR

MAINTENANCEREQUIREDINDICATOR

VTM-4 INDICATOR

DOOR AND TAILGATEOPEN MONITOR

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

SEAT BELT REMINDER LIGHT

BRAKE LAMP INDICATOR

SIDE AIRBAGCUTOFF INDICATOR

PARKING BRAKEAND BRAKE SYSTEMINDICATOR

WASHER LEVELINDICATOR

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEMINDICATOR

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMINDICATOR

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM INDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROLINDICATOR

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR

LIGHTS ONINDICATOR

VSA ACTIVATIONINDICATOR

(P.376)

(P.68)

(P.68)

(P.76)

(P.72)

(P.72)

(P.70)

(P.71)

(P.73) (P.68)

(P.70)

(P.69)

(P.68)

(P.73)

(P.72)

(P.71)

(P.69)

(P.69)

(P.68)(P.71)

(P.71)

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your vehicle. See page .

The engine can be severely damagedif this light flashes or stays on whenthe engine is running. For completeinformation, see page .

If this light comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For completeinformation, see page .

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). It is areminder to you and your passengersto protect yourselves by fasteningthe seat belts. A beeper also soundsif you have not fastened your seatbelt.

If you do not fasten your seat belt,the beeper will stop after a fewseconds but the light stays on untilyou do. Both the light and the beeperstay off if you fasten your seat beltbefore turning on the ignition.

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates a potential problem withyour front airbags or automatic seatbelt tensioners. This light will alsoalert you to a potential problem withyour side airbags, passenger’s sideairbag automatic cutoff system,driver’s seat position sensor, or frontpassenger’s weight sensors. Forcomplete information, see page .

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates that the passenger’s sideairbag has automatically shut off.For complete information, see page

.

373

374

56

57

375

Indicator Lights


Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator

Seat Belt Reminder Light

Side Airbag CutoffIndicator

68

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch ON (II). It will then go off ifyou have inserted a properly-codedignition key. If it is not a properly-coded key, the indicator will blinkand the engine will not start (seepage ).

This indicator also blinks severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY(I) or LOCK (0).

This light normally comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II), and whenthe ignition switch is turned toSTART (III). If this light comes on atany other time, there is a problem inthe ABS. If this happens, take thevehicle to your dealer to have itchecked. With the light on, yourvehicle still has normal brakingability but no anti-lock. For completeinformation, see page .

This light has two functions:

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch ON (II). Itis a reminder to check the parkingbrake. A beeper sounds if you tryto drive with the parking brake notfully released. Driving with theparking brake not fully releasedcan damage the brakes and tires.

If the indicator remains lit afteryou have fully released theparking brake while the engine isrunning, or if it comes on whiledriving, it can indicate a problemin the brake system. For completeinformation, see page .

1.

2.

91

377

264

Indicator Lights


Immobilizer SystemIndicator

Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator

Parking Brake and Brake SystemIndicator

69

U.S. Canada CanadaU.S.

The left or right turn signal lightblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If the light does not blink orblinks rapidly, it usually means oneof the turn signal bulbs is burned out(see page ). Replace the bulb assoon as possible, since other driverscannot see that you are signaling.

When you turn on the HazardWarning switch, both turn signallights blink. All turn signals on theoutside of the vehicle should flash.

The appropriate light comes on inthis display if the tailgate or any dooris not closed tightly.

All the lights in the monitor displaycome on for a few seconds when youturn the ignition switch to ON (II).

If a brake light does not work, theindicator comes on

when you push the brake pedal withthe ignition switch ON (II).

A burned out brake light is a hazardwhen drivers behind you cannot tellyou are braking. Have your brakelights repaired right away.

342

Indicator Lights


Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators

Door and Tailgate Open MonitorBrake Lamp Indicator

70

BRAKE LAMP

Canadian models onlyThis indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II) withthe headlight switch off and theparking brake set. It should go off ifyou turn on the headlights or releasethe parking brake. If it comes on atany other time, it means there is aproblem with the DRL. There mayalso be a problem with the highbeam headlights.

This light comes on with the highbeam headlights. See page forinformation on the headlightcontrols.

On Canadian models, this indicatorcomes on with reduced brightnesswhen the Daytime Running Lights(DRL) are on (see page ).

This lights when you set the cruisecontrol. See page for informationon operating the cruise control.

This light comes on as a reminderthat you must refuel soon.

This light comes on when thewasher fluid level is low. Add washerfluid when you see this light come on(see page ).

216

79

82

316

‘‘Daytime RunningLights’’ Indicator

High Beam Indicator

Cruise Control Indicator

Low Fuel Indicator

Washer Level Indicator

Indicator Lights


This light normally comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II). If this lightcomes on at any other time, there isa problem in the 4WD system. Takethe vehicle to your dealer to have itchecked.

This indicator monitors thetemperature of the automatictransmission fluid. The indicatorshould come on for a few secondswhen you turn the ignition switchON (II). If it comes on while driving,it indicates the transmission fluidtemperature is too high. Pull to theside of the road when it is safe, shiftto Park, and let the engine idle untilthe indicator goes out.

If the indicator blinks while driving,pull to the side of the road when it issafe, shift to Park, and let the engineidle until the indicator goes out.

This indicator reminds you that theexterior lights are on. It comes onwhen the light switch is in either the

or position. This indicatorwill come on when the light switch isin AUTO and the lights turn onautomatically. If you turn the ignitionswitch to ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK(0) without turning off the lightswitch, this indicator will remain on.A reminder chime will also soundwhen you open the driver’s door.

On cars with automatic lighting (seepage )80

Indicator Lights


VTM-4 IndicatorA/T TemperatureIndicator

Lights On Indicator(U.S. models only)

72

Continuing to drive with the A/TTemperature indicator lit may causeserious damage to the transmission.

Continuing to drive with the VTM-4indicator blinking may cause seriousdamage to the system.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II).

If this light comes on and stays on atany other time, or it does not comeon when you turn the ignition switchON (II), there is a problem with theVSA system. Take the car to yourdealer to have it checked. WithoutVSA, your car still has normaldriving ability, but will not have VSAtraction and stability enhancement.See page for more informationon the VSA system.

This indicator has three functions:

It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the VehicleStability Assist (VSA) system.

It flashes when VSA is active (seepage ).

It comes on along with the VSAsystem indicator if there is aproblem with the VSA system.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II). See page

for more information on theVSA system.

1.

2.

3.

266

266

266

Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

VSA Activation Indicator

Indicator Lights


U.S. Models

Canadian Models

This shows your speed in miles perhour (mph). The smaller innernumbers are the speed in kilometersper hour (km/h).

This shows your speed in kilometersper hour (km/h). The smaller innernumbers are the speed in miles perhour (mph).

The tachometer shows the enginespeed in revolutions per minute(rpm). To protect the engine fromdamage, never drive with thetachometer needle in the red zone.

The odometer shows the total dis-tance your vehicle has been driven.It measures miles in U.S. models andkilometers in Canadian models.It is illegal under U.S. federal law andCanadian provincial regulations todisconnect, reset, or alter theodometer with the intent to changethe number of miles or kilometersindicated.

Speedometer

Odometer

Tachometer

Gauges


TACHOMETER

MAINTENANCEREQUIRED INDICATOR

TRIP METER

ODOMETERTRIP METER RESET BUTTON

TRIP METERSELECT BUTTON

TEMPERATUREGAUGE

FUEL GAUGESPEEDOMETER

This meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it.

There are two trip meters: Trip Aand Trip B. Switch between thesedisplays by pressing the Selectbutton repeatedly. Each trip meterworks independently, so you cankeep track of two different distances.When you turn the ignition switchON (II), what you last selected is

displayed.

To reset a trip meter, display it, andthen press and hold the Reset buttonuntil the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.Both trip meters will reset if thevehicle’s battery goes dead or isdisconnected.

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should risefrom the bottom blue mark to aboutthe middle of the gauge. In severedriving conditions, such as very hotweather or a long period of uphilldriving, the pointer may rise to theupper white mark. If it reaches thered (Hot) mark, pull safely to theside of the road. Turn to page forinstructions and precautions onchecking the engine’s coolingsystem.

This shows how much fuel you have.It is most accurate when the vehicleis on level ground. It may showslightly more or less than the actualamount when you are driving oncurvy or hilly roads.

The needle returns to the bottomafter you turn off the ignition. Thegauge shows the fuel level readingimmediately after you turn theignition switch back ON (II).

371

Trip Meter

Temperature Gauge

Fuel Gauge

Gauges


SELECT BUTTON

RESET BUTTON

Avoid driving with an extremely lowf uel level. Running out of f uel couldcause the engine to misf ire, damagingthe catalytic converter.

This indicator reminds you that it istime to take your vehicle in forscheduled maintenance.Refer to the Maintenance Schedulesfor Normal and Severe DrivingConditions on pages and .

For the first 6,000 miles (9,600 km)after the Maintenance RequiredIndicator is reset, it will come on fortwo seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II).

Between 6,000 miles (9,600 km) and7,500 miles (12,000 km) thisindicator will light for two secondswhen you first turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II), and then flash forten seconds.

If you exceed 7,500 miles (12,000km) without having the scheduledmaintenance performed, thisindicator will remain on as a constantreminder.

Your dealer will reset this indicatorafter completing the scheduledmaintenance. If this maintenance isdone by someone other than yourAcura dealer, reset the indicator asfollows.

298 300

Maintenance Required Indicator

Gauges


MAINTENANCE REQUIRED INDICATOR

Turn off the engine.

Press and hold the select and resetbuttons on the instrument panel,then turn the ignition switch ON(II).

Hold the buttons forapproximately ten seconds untilthe indicator resets.

1.

2.

3.

Gauges


SELECT BUTTON

RESET BUTTON

＊

＊

The two levers on the steeringcolumn contain controls for drivingfeatures you use most often. The leftlever controls the turn signals,headlights, and high beams. Theright lever controls the windshieldwashers and wipers.

The switches for the hazard warninglights and rear window defogger arelocated to the right of the steeringcolumn.

The controls under the left air ventare for the cruise control, themoonroof, the fog lights, and theVSA light.

To use the horn, press the padaround the ‘‘A’’ logo.

The tilt adjustment lever on theunderside of the steering columnallows you to tilt the steering wheel.

Controls Near the Steering Wheel


VEHICLESTABILITYASSISTSYSTEMOFFSWITCH

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS

FOG LIGHTS

CRUISECONTROL

MOONROOFSWITCH

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLS

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT

HORN

CRUISECONTROL

WINDSHIELDWIPERS/WASHERS

LIGHT CONTROLSWITCH

HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTS

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

VTM-4 LOCKINSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS

PASSENGERAIRBAGCUTOFFINDICATOR

(P.79/83)

(P.88)

(P.267)

(P.216)

(P.114)

(P.181)

(P.89)

(P.216)

(P.83/87)

(P.128)

(P.87)

(P.58)

(P.88)(P.259)

(P.82)

If you leave the lights on with theignition switch in ACCESSORY (I)or LOCK (0), you will hear areminder chime when you open thedriver’s door.

The rotating switch on the left levercontrols the lights. Turning thisswitch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turnson the parking lights, taillights,instrument panel lights, side-markerlights, and rear license plate lights.Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the headlights.

To change between low beams andhigh beams, pull the turn signal leveruntil you hear a click, then let go.The blue high beam indicator willlight (see page ).

When the light switch is in either ofthese positions, the Lights Onindicator comes on as a reminder.This light remains on if you leave thelight switch on and turn the ignitionswitch to ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK(0).

71

CONTINUED

On vehicles with automatic lighting

Headlights



To flash the high beams, pull theturn signal lever back lightly, thenrelease it. The high beams will comeon and go off.

The high beams will stay on for aslong as you hold the lever back, nomatter what position the headlightswitch is in.

The Automatic Lighting featureturns on the headlights, all otherexterior lights, and the instrumentpanel lights when it senses lowambient light.

To turn on automatic lighting, turnthe light switch to AUTO at any time.The lights will come on automaticallywhen the outside light level becomeslow (at dusk, for example). TheLights On indicator comes on as areminder. The lights and indicatorwill turn off automatically when thesystem senses high ambient light.

The lights will remain on when youturn off the ignition switch. They willturn off automatically when you openthe driver’s door. To turn them onagain, either turn the ignition switchto ON (II) or turn the light switch to

.

On Touring Model



Automatic Lighting

80

AUTO POSITION

Even with the automatic lightingfeature turned on, we recommendthat you turn on the lights manuallywhen driving at night or in a densefog, or when you enter dark areas,such as long tunnels or parkingstructures.

The Automatic Lighting Off featureturns off the headlights, fog lights,parking lights, taillights, side markerlights, license plate lights andinstrument panel lights within 15seconds of removing the key fromthe ignition switch and closing thedriver’s door.

This feature activates if you leavethe headlight switch in the or

position, remove the key, open,then close the driver’s door.If you remove the key from theignition switch with the headlightswitch on, but do not open the doorand get out, the lights will turn offafter 10 minutes.

Do not leave the light switch inAUTO if you will not be driving thevehicle for an extended period (aweek or more). You should also turnoff the lights if you plan to leave theengine idling or the engine off for along time. The automatic lighting feature is

controlled by a sensor located on topof the dashboard. Do not cover thissensor or spill liquids on it.

CONTINUED

Without Touring Package



Automatic Lighting Off Feature

81

LIGHT SENSOR

The dial on the instrument panelcontrols the brightness of theinstrument panel lights. Turn the dialto adjust the brightness.

The lights will turn on again whenyou unlock or open the driver’s door.If you unlock the door, but do notopen it within 15 seconds, the lightswill go off. With the driver’s dooropen, you will hear a lights-onreminder chime.

With the headlight switch off, thehigh beam headlights come on withreduced brightness when you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II) andrelease the parking brake. Theyremain on until you turn the ignitionoff, even if you set the parking brake.

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.

Instrument Panel BrightnessDaytime Running Lights(Canadian Models)



INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESSCONTROL DIAL

Signal a turn or lane change with thislever. Push down on the lever tosignal a left turn, and up to signal aright turn. If you push it up or downall the way, the turn signal continuesto blink even when you release thelever. It shuts off automatically asyou complete the turn.

To signal a lane change, push lightlyon the turn signal lever in the properdirection and hold it. The lever willreturn to the center position as soonas you release it.

The right lever controls the wind-shield wipers and washers. Therotary switch at the end of the leverhas three positions;

INT: intermittent: low speed: high speed

CONTINUED

Without Touring PackageTurn Signals Windshield Wipers



TURN SIGNAL LEVER

If you turn the INT TIME ring to theshortest delay, the wipers willchange from intermittent to lowspeed operation when vehicle speedexceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).

In intermittent, the wipers operateevery few seconds. You can varyhow often the wipers sweep thewindshield by turning the INT TIMEring next to the rotary switch. Thesweep interval will change slightlywith speed; getting shorter as youdrive faster. In low speed and highspeed the wipers run continuously.

To operate the wipers in mist mode,push the control lever down. Thewipers run at high speed until yourelease the lever. This gives you aquick way to clear the windshield.



CONTINUED

The automatic wiper system sensesrainfall and automatically turns onthe windshield wipers. To ehablesensing, turn the rotary switch at theend of the wiper lever to AUTO.

When the system senses rainfall, itturns on the windshield wipers andvaries their speed (intermittent, lowspeed, or high speed) depending onhow hard it is raining.

You can adjust the sensitivity of thesystem by turning the AUTO SENSring next to the rotary switch.

When the rotary switch is in the(low speed) or (high speed)position, the windshield wipers runat that speed. Automatic sensing isdisabled.

Touring Model



Automatic Wipers

85

If you try to clean the windshieldaround the rainfall sensor using acloth soaked with water with theignition switch in the ON (II)position and the wiper switch in theAUTO position, the wiper mayoperate unexpectedly and you mayget injured. Make sure to turn offthe wipers before you wash yourvehicle.

To operate the wipers in mist mode,push the control lever down. Thewipers run at high speed until yourelease the lever. This gives you aquick way to clear the windshield.

The rainfall sensor is located in thewindshield near the rearview mirror.If the sensor is covered with mud, oil,dust, etc., the wipers may notoperate properly or may operateunexpectedly.



RAINFALL SENSOR

The rear window wiper switch islocated next to the windshield wiperswitch.

To clean the windshield, pull back onthe wiper control lever. The washersspray until you release the lever. Thewipers run at low speed while you’repulling the lever, then complete onemore sweep of the windshield afteryou release it.

Push the red button to the right ofthe display to turn on the hazardwarning lights (four-way flashers).This causes all four outside turnsignals and both indicators in theinstrument panel to flash. Use thehazard warning lights if you need topark in a dangerous area near heavytraffic, or if your vehicle is disabled.

To activate the rear windshield wiper,turn the switch ‘‘ON’’. The wiperoperates intermittently. If you wishto use the wiper and washer, turnand hold the switch one position upfrom ‘‘ON’’.

Hazard WarningRear Window Wiper and WasherWindshield Washers



The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The light abovethe button lights to show thedefogger is on. If you do not turn itoff, the defogger will shut itself offafter about 15 minutes. It also shutsoff when you turn off the ignition.You have to turn it on again whenyou restart the vehicle.

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The defogger wires on the inside ofthe rear window can be accidentallydamaged. When cleaning the glass,always wipe side to side.

Turn the fog lights on and off bypressing the button. The indicator inthe button lights to show the foglights are on.

You can use the fog lights only whenthe headlights are on low beam.They will go off when you turn theheadlights off or onto high beam.

Rear Window Defogger Fog Lights



Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in that position.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up and down.

To adjust the steering wheel upwardor downward:

Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.

Move the steering wheel to thedesired position, making sure thewheel points toward your chest,not toward your face. Make sureyou can see the instrument panelgauges and the indicator lights.

Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

3.

4.

1.

2.

See page for important safetyinformation about how to properlyposition the steering wheel.

18Steering Wheel Adjustment



Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thevehicle and be seriously injuredin a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

Your vehicle comes with two masterkeys and a valet key.The master key fits all the locks onyour vehicle:• Ignition• Driver’s Door• Glove box

The valet key works only in theignition and the door locks. You cankeep the glove box locked when youleave your vehicle and valet key at aparking facility.

You should have received a keynumber tag with your keys. You willneed this key number if you everhave to get a lost key replaced. Keepthe tag stored in a safe place. If youneed to replace a key, use only anAcura-approved key blank.

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theImmobilizer System. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

The keys do not contain batteries.Do not try to take them apart.

Your vehicle also comes with tworemote transmitters; see page foran explanation of their operation.

95

Keys

Remote Transmitter

Keys and Locks


KEYNUMBERTAG

MASTERKEYS(BLACK)

VALET KEY(GRAY)

The Immobilizer System protectsyour vehicle from theft. A properly-coded master or valet key must beused in the ignition switch for theengine to start. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used,the engine’s fuel system is disabled.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), the Immobilizer Systemindicator should come on for a fewseconds, then go out. If the indicatorstarts to blink, it means the systemdoes not recognize the coding of thekey. Turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0), remove the key, reinsertit, and turn the switch to ON (II)again.

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object is near theignition switch when you insert thekey. To make sure the systemrecognizes the key code:

Do not keep other immobilizerkeys on the same key ring.

Use a plastic or leather key fob,not metal.

Keep other keys away from yourvehicle’s key and the ignitionswitch while trying to start theengine.

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your Acura dealer.

The Immobilizer System indicatorwill also blink several times whenyou turn the ignition switch from ON(II) to ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0).

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle undriveable.

If you have lost your key and youcannot start the engine, contact yourAcura dealer.

CONTINUED

Immobilizer System

Keys and Locks


－

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may sometimes makeit difficult to turn the key fromLOCK to ACCESSORY. Firmly turnthe steering wheel to the left or tothe right as you turn the key.

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To switch from ACCESSORY toLOCK, you must push the key inslightly as you turn it. The shift levermust also be in Park. The anti-theftlock will lock the steering columnwhen you remove the key.

The ignition switch is on the rightside of the steering column. It hasfour positions:• LOCK (0)• ACCESSORY (I)• ON (II)• START (III)

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

LOCK (0)Ignition Switch

Keys and Locks


－

－

－ Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to ON (II) when you let go ofthe key.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. All featuresand accessories on the vehicle areusable. Several of the lights on theinstrument panel come on as a testwhen you turn the ignition switchfrom ACCESSORY to ON.

The engine will not start if theImmobilizer System does notrecognize the key’s coding (see page

).

In this position,you can operate the audio systemand the accessory power socket.

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door. Remove the key toturn off the beeper.

Each front door has a master doorlock switch. Either switch locks andunlocks all doors and the tailgate.Push the switch down to lock alldoors and the tailgate, and up tounlock them.

91

CONTINUED

START (III) Power Door Locks

ON (II)

ACCESSORY (I)

Keys and Locks


MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Each door has a lock tab on the top.When you push down the lock tab onthe driver’s door, all the doors andthe tailgate lock. Pulling up the locktab on the driver’s door unlocks onlythat door. The lock tabs on the otherdoors lock and unlock only that door.

To lock the front passenger’s doorwhen getting out of the vehicle, pushthe lock tab down and close the door.To lock the driver’s door, along with

the remaining doors and the tailgate,push the lock tab down or push themaster switch down, then close thedoor.

All doors and the tailgate can belocked from the outside by using thekey in the driver’s door. To unlockonly the driver’s door from theoutside, turn the key and release it.If you turn the key and hold it, alldoors and the tailgate will unlock.

If you forget and leave the key in theignition switch, Lockout Preventionwill not allow you to lock the driver’sdoor. With the driver’s door openand the key in the ignition, bothmaster door lock switches aredisabled. However, if the driver’sdoor is not open, the master doorlock switches are not disabled.Pushing the switch down on theopen passenger’s door will lock alldoors. If you try to lock an opendriver’s door by pushing down thelock tab, the tabs on all doors pop up.Pushing down the lock tab on thepassenger’s door only locks that door.

Lockout Prevention

Keys and Locks


LOCK TAB

You can lock and unlock your vehiclewith the remote transmitter. Whenyou push the LOCK button, all doorsand the tailgate lock. The parkinglights, side marker lights, taillightsand instrument panel lights flashonce.

When you push the LOCK button asecond time within 5 seconds afteryou have locked the doors, you willhear a beep to verify that thesecurity system has set.

When you push the UNLOCK buttononce, only the driver’s door unlocks.The remaining doors and the tailgateunlock when you push the button asecond time. The parking lights, sidemarker lights, taillights andinstrument panel lights flash twicewhen you push the button.

If you unlock the doors and thetailgate with the remote transmitter,but do not open any door or thetailgate within 30 seconds, all doorsand the tailgate automatically relock.

You cannot lock the doors and thetailgate with the remote transmitterif any door or the tailgate is not fullyclosed. You cannot lock or unlockthe doors and the tailgate with thekey in the ignition switch.

When you press the UNLOCKbutton, the front and rear individualmap lights and the cargo area light,depending on their switch positions,will come on (see page ). If youdo not open any door or the tailgate,the lights stay on for about 30seconds, then go out. If you relockthe doors and the tailgate with theremote transmitter before 30seconds have elapsed, the lights will

go off immediately.

128

CONTINUED

Remote Transmitter

Keys and Locks


LED

UNLOCKBUTTON

PANICBUTTON

LOCKBUTTON

Panic mode allows you to remotelyactivate your vehicle’s horn andlights to attract attention. Whenactivated, the horn will sound, andthe headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights, taillights andinstrument panel lights will flash forabout 30 seconds. To activate panicmode, press and hold the PANICbutton for about one second.

When the remote transmitter’sbattery begins to get weak, it maytake several pushes on the button tolock or unlock the doors and thetailgate, and the LED will get dim.Replace the battery as soon aspossible.

Battery type: CR2025

To replace the battery, place a clothon the edge of the transmitter andremove the upper half by carefullyprying on the edge with a small flat-tip screwdriver.

To cancel Panic mode before 30seconds, press any button on theremote transmitter. You can alsoturn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Panic mode will not activate if thekey is in the ON (II) position.

Panic Mode Replacing the Battery

Keys and Locks


＋




Avoid severe shock to the trans-mitter, such as dropping or throwingit. Also, protect it from extreme hotor cold temperatures.

Clean the transmitter case with asoft cloth. Do not use strongcleaners or solvents that could harmthe case. Immersing the transmitterin any liquid will harm the trans-mitter and cause it to not functionproperly.

If you lose a transmitter, you willneed to have the replacementprogrammed to your vehicle’ssystem by your Acura dealer. Anyother transmitters you have will alsoneed to be reprogrammed.

Remove the old battery and note thepolarity. Make sure the polarity ofthe new battery is the same ( sidefacing up), then insert it in thetransmitter.

Snap the two halves of thetransmitter case back together.

CONTINUED

Transmitter Care

Keys and Locks


The remote transmitters will alsoactivate the Driving PositionMemory System (see page ).When you open the driver’s doorafter unlocking it with the remotetransmitter, you will hear a beep.The driver’s seat and outside mirrorsmove to the positions stored in thatmemory location. You will hear twobeeps when the movement is

complete.

If the seat and mirrors are already inthe proper positions, you will hearthree beeps when you open the door.

The driving position memoryactivated (Memory 1, Memory 2) isshown on the back of eachtransmitter. Make sure you storeyour desired driving position in thememory that is activated by thetransmitter you normally carry.

To turn it back on, repeat thisprocedure. The LED will come onfor one second to indicate thefeature has been turned on.

You can turn the driving positionmemory activation off and on. Toturn it off, press and hold the LOCKand UNLOCK buttons at the sametime for about one second. The LEDin the remote transmitter will blinktwice. Then release the buttons.

118

On Touring Model

Recalling a Memorized DrivingPosition

Keys and Locks


With Memory 1 With Memory 2

See page for information oncargo loading. Keep the tailgateclosed at all times while driving toavoid damaging the tailgate and toprevent exhaust gas from gettinginto the interior. See

on page .

To open the tailgate, pull the handle,then lift up the tailgate.

The childproof door locks aredesigned to prevent children seatedin the rear from accidentally openingthe rear doors. Each rear door has alock lever near the edge. With thelever in the LOCK position, the doorcannot be opened from the insideregardless of the position of the locktab. To open the door, pull the locktab up and use the outside doorhandle.

To close the tailgate, use the innerhandle to pull the tailgate down, thenpress down on the back edge.

245

62Carbon

Monoxide Hazard

Childproof Door Locks Tailgate

Keys and Locks


LOCK LEVER HANDLE

Open the glove box by squeezing thehandle. Close it with a firm push.Lock or unlock the glove box withthe master key.

Glove Box

Keys and Locks


GLOVE BOX

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

－

Pull up or push down on the front ofthe switch to move the seat bottom’sfront edge up or down. Pull up orpush down on the rear of the switchto move the rear of the seat bottomup or down.Push the horizontal switch forward

or backward to move the seatforward or backward.

The long horizontal switch adjuststhe seat bottom in several directions.The short vertical switch adjusts theseat-back angle.

Your Acura has power adjustmentsfor the driver’s seat. The two powerseat adjustment switches are on theoutside edge of the seat bottom.

You can adjust the seat with theignition switch in any position. Makeall seat adjustments before you startdriving.

The Touring package also has poweradjustments for the front passenger’sseat. The MDX without the Touringpackage has manual adjustments.

The second and third row seats inboth models have manualadjustments.

See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.

12 13

CONTINUED

Power Seat Adjustments

Seats


Pull the center of the horizontalswitch up to raise the seat. Push itdown to lower the seat.

Adjust the seat-back angle bypushing the rear switch in thedirection you want to move.

Vary the lumbar support by movingthe lever on the right side of theseat-back. Move the lever forward orbackward to adjust the lumbarsupport through its full range.

Driver’s Lumbar Support

Seats


－

To adjust the seat forward andbackward, pull up on the lever underthe seat cushion’s front edge. Movethe seat to the desired position andrelease the lever. Try to move theseat to make sure it is locked inposition.

To change the seat-back angle of thefront seats, pull up on the lever onthe outside of the seat bottom.

Make all seat adjustments beforeyou start driving.

See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.

12 13Manual Seat Adjustments

Seats


To change the seat-back angle of theseats in the second row, pull up onthe handle on the outside of the seat-back.

To adjust the seat-back angle of thethird seat, pull on the handle on theback of the seat-back, move the seat-back to the desired position, andrelease the handle. Let the seat-backlatch in the new position.

Second and Third Row SeatAdjustments

Seats


SECONDSEAT HANDLE

THIRDSEAT

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning about how toproperly position the head restraints.

14To remove a head restraint forcleaning or repair, pull it up as far asit will go. Push the release buttonand pull the restraint out of the seat-back.

The head restraints adjust for height.You need both hands to adjust therestraint. Do not attempt to adjust itwhile driving. To raise it, pull upward.To lower the restraint, push therelease button sideways and pushthe restraint down.

The head restraints help protect youand your passengers from whiplashand other injuries. They are mosteffective when you adjust them sothe back of the occupant’s head restsagainst the center of the restraint. Ataller person should adjust therestraint as high as possible.

Your vehicle is equipped with headrestraints in all seating positions.

Head Restraints

Seats


RELEASE BUTTON

To get into the third row seats, pullup the lever on the side of thepassenger’s side second row seat-back. The seat-back will tilt forward,and the seat will slide forward.

After you return the seat-back to theupright position, push the whole seatbackwards until it latches. Makesure the seat is fully latched beforesitting in it.

The left and right halves of thesecond seat can be folded upseparately to create more cargospace.

If you are folding the left half ofthe seat, use the ignition key torelease the center seat belt fromthe detachable anchor. Allow theseat belt to retract into the roof.Insert the latch plate into the roofholder.

Fold the seat-back forward.

Reverse this procedure to return theseat to the upright position. Makesure the seat is locked securelybefore driving.

(Left half) Remove the center seatbelt from its holder in the roof, andconnect it to the detachable anchor(see page ).

Pull up the handle on the outsideof the seat-back.

Lower the head restraint to itslowest position.

2.

3.

1.

4.

109

Rear Seat Access Folding the Second Seat

Seats


RELEASE LEVER

HANDLE

Use the ignition key to release theseat belt from the detachableanchor.

To create more cargo space, you canfold the third seat forward.To fold the third seat:

Remove the head restraints bypushing the release buttons andpulling the restraints out.

Store the head restraints in thestorage compartment. Make surethe head restraints are face up(storing them face down candamage the compartment or theheadrests), then insert the shaftsinto the holes in the sides of thestorage compartment.

1.

2. 3.

CONTINUED

Folding the Third Seat

Seats


RELEASE BUTTON

Make sure the outer shoulder beltsare positioned on each hookwhenever the third seat is folded.

Unlock the seat-back by pullingthe handle. Push the seat-backforward.

Reinstall the head restraints.Reconnect the seat belts to thedetachable anchors.

Make sure all items in the cargo areaare secured. Loose items can flyforward and cause injury if you haveto brake hard. Seeon page .

Reverse this procedure to return theseat to the upright position. Makesure the seat is locked securelybefore driving.

4.

245Carrying Cargo

Seats


HANDLE

The seat belts in the center seat ofthe second row and in both of thethird row seats are equipped with adetachable seat belt anchor thatallows the seat belt to be unlatchedwhen the seats are folded down.

When the seat-back is returned to itsupright position, be sure to latch thedetachable anchor by lining up thetriangle marks on the small latchplate and buckle and inserting theplate into the buckle. Tug on the seatbelt to make sure the detachableanchor is securely attached.

To unlatch the detachable anchorbefore folding down a seat-back,insert a key into the slot on the sideof the small buckle and allow theseat belt to retract.

Once the seat belt has completelyretracted, secure the latch plates. Inthe second row, the latch platesshould be placed into their holdingslots in the ceiling. In the third row,the small latch plate should beclipped to the seat belt webbing.

Detachable Anchors

Seats


SMALL LATCH PLATE

TRIANGULAR MARK

Using a seat belt with thedetachable anchor unlatchedincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Before using the seat belt,make sure the detachableanchor is correctly latched.

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters. The ignition switchmust be ON (II) to use them. Pushthe front of the switch, HI, to rapidlyheat up the seat. After the seatreaches a comfortable temperature,select LO by pushing the back of theswitch. This will keep the seat warm.

Follow these precautions wheneveryou use the seat heaters:

Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly. Select the LOsetting when the seats feel warm.The HI setting draws largeamounts of current from thebattery.

Do not use the seat heaters, evenon the LO setting, if the engine isleft idling for an extended period.They can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.

The HI or LO indicator lights andremains lit until you turn it off bypushing the opposite side of theswitch lightly. The indicator will turnoff.

In HI, the heater turns off when theseat gets warm, and turns back onafter the seat’s temperature drops. Itcontinues to cycle as long as youleave it set on HI. The HI indicatorremains lit as a reminder that youhave the heater on.

In LO, the heater runs continuously.It does not cycle with temperaturechanges.

Because of the sensors for the sideairbag system, there is no heater inthe passenger’s seat-back.

Seat Heaters

Seat Heaters


SEAT HEATERS

Your vehicle’s windows areelectrically-powered. Turn theignition switch to ON (II) to raise orlower any window.

Each door has a switch that controlsits window. To open the window,push the switch down and hold it.Release the switch when you wantthe window to stop. Close thewindow by pulling back on theswitch and holding it.

The driver’s door armrest has amaster power window control panel.To open any of the passenger’swindows, push down on the switchand hold it down until the windowreaches the desired position. Toclose the window, pull back on thewindow switch. Release the switchwhen the window gets to the positionyou want.

CONTINUED

Power Windows


DRIVER’S WINDOWSWITCH

MAIN SWITCH

－

The master control panel also con-tains these extra features:

To open the driver’swindow fully, push the windowswitch firmly down and release it.The window automatically goes allthe way down. To stop the windowfrom going all the way down, pullback on the window switch briefly.

The MAIN switch controls power tothe front passenger’s window andthe rear power windows. With thisswitch off, the passenger’s windowscannot be raised or lowered. TheMAIN switch does not affect thedriver’s window. Keep the MAINswitch off when you have children inthe vehicle so they do not injurethemselves by operating thewindows unintentionally.

To close the driver’s window fully,pull back the window switch firmly,then release it. The windowautomatically goes all the way up. Tostop the window from going all theway up, push down on the windowswitch briefly.

To open or close the driver’s windowpartially, push down or pull back onthe window switch lightly and hold it.The window will stop when yourelease the switch.

AUTO


Power Windows

112

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

The power window system has a key-off delay function. The windows willstill operate for up to ten minutesafter you turn off the ignition.Opening either front door cancelsthe delay function. You must turnthe ignition switch ON (II) againbefore you can operate the windows.

If the driver’s window runs into anyobstacle while it is closingautomatically, it will reversedirection, and then stop. To close thewindow, remove the obstacle, thenuse the window switch again.

Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or thedriver’s window fuse is removed, theAUTO function will be disabled. Thepower window system needs to bereset after reconnecting the batteryor installing the fuse. You should dothe following.

Any impact due to road conditionsmay cause the auto reverse functionwork unexpectedly on the closingwindow. If it happens frequently,there is a problem with your powerwindow system. You should haveyour car inspected by your dealer.You can still close the window bypulling back on the window switchlightly and hold it.

If the power windows do not operateproperly after resetting, have yourvehicle checked by a Acura dealer.

Start the engine. Push down onthe driver’s window switch untilthe window is fully open.

Pull back on the driver’s windowswitch to close the windowcompletely, then hold the switchfor a second or two more.

1.

2.

Power Windows


Auto Reverse

113

The moonroof has two positions: itcan be tilted up in the back forventilation, or it can be slid back intothe roof. Use the switch under theleft dashboard vent to operate themoonroof. The ignition switch mustbe ON (II).

To tilt up the back of the moonroof,press and hold the center button( ). To close the moonroof,press and hold the top of the switch( ). To open the moonroof,press and hold the bottom of theswitch ( ). Release the switchwhen the moonroof gets to thedesired position. Make sureeveryone’s hands are away from themoonroof before opening or closingit.

The moonroof has a key-off delay.You can still open and close themoonroof for up to ten minutes afteryou turn off the ignition. The key-offdelay cancels as soon as you openeither front door. You must thenturn the ignition ON (II) for themoonroof to operate.

Moonroof


MOONROOF SWITCH

Opening or closing themoonroof on someone’s handsor fingers can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure all hands and fingersare clear of the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

If you try to open the moonroof inbelow-f reezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or motor.

The inside mirror can automaticallydarken to reduce glare. To turn onthis feature, press the button on thebottom of the mirror. The AUTOindicator comes on as a reminder.When it is on, the mirror darkenswhen it senses the headlights of avehicle behind you, then returns tonormal visibility when the lights aregone. Press the button again to turnoff this sensing.

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

Mirrors


SENSOR

AUTO SWITCH

INDICATOR

Adjust the outside mirrors with theadjustment switch on the left side ofthe dashboard:

Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

Move the selector switch to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up, or down.

When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns off theadjustment switch so you can’tmove a mirror out of position byaccidentally bumping the switch.

With the selector switch in thecenter (off) position, the passenger’sside mirror will pivot downwardslightly when you shift thetransmission into reverse. This givesyou a better view of the side of thevehicle while parallel parking. Themirror returns to its original positionwhen you take the transmission outof reverse.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Touring ModelAdjusting the Power Mirrors

Mirrors


SELECTOR SWITCH ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

To apply the parking brake, push theparking brake pedal down with yourfoot. To release the parking brake,push on the pedal again. The parkingbrake light on the instrument panelshould go out when the parkingbrake is fully released with theengine running. (see page .)

The outside mirrors are heated to re-move fog and frost. With the ignitionswitch ON (II), turn on the heatersby pressing the button. The light inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off.

69

Parking Brake

Mirrors, Parking Brake


HEATED MIRROR BUTTON PARKING BRAKE PEDAL

Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes and axles.

Turn the ignition switch ON (II).You cannot add a new drivingposition in the memory unless theignition switch is ON (II). You canrecall a memorized position withthe ignition switch in any position.

Seat and outside mirror positions, fortwo different drivers or drivingconditions, can be stored in separatememories. You select a memorizedposition by pushing the appropriatebutton or using the appropriateremote transmitter (Memory 1 orMemory 2).

Store a driving position as explainedin this section only when the vehicleis parked.

Adjust the seat to a comfortableposition (see page ). Press and release the MEMO

button on the control panel. Youwill hear a beep. Immediatelypress and hold one of the memorybuttons (1 or 2) until you hear twobeeps. The indicator light in thememory button will come on. Thecurrent positions of the driver’sseat and outside mirrors are nowstored.

Your Acura has a memory featurefor the driver’s seat and outsidemirror positions.

Adjust the outside mirrors for bestvisibility (see page ).

3.

1.

2.

116

101

Touring Model Storing a Driving Position in Memory

Driving Position Memory System


MEMO BUTTON

Doing any of the following afterpressing the MEMO button willcancel the storing procedure.

Not pressing a memory buttonwithin 5 seconds.

You can select memorized positionsas follows.

Make sure the parking brake is setand the shift lever is in Park.

Readjusting the seat position.

Readjusting the outside mirrorposition.

Each memory button stores only onedriving position. Storing a newposition erases the previous settingstored in that button’s memory. Ifyou want to add a new position whileretaining the current one, use theother memory button.

Press the desired memory button(1 or 2) until you hear a beep, thenrelease the button.

The system will move the seat andoutside mirrors to the memorizedpositions. The indicator light in theselected memory button will flashduring movement. When theadjustments are complete, you willhear two beeps and the indicatorlight will remain on.

All stored driving positions will belost if your vehicle’s battery goesdead or is disconnected.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Selecting a Memorized Position



MEMORY BUTTONS

Press any button on the controlpanel: MEMO, 1 or 2.

To stop the system’s automatic ad-justment;

Push any of the adjustmentswitches for the seat.Shift out of Park.Adjust the outside mirrors.

If desired, you can use theadjustment switches to change thepositions of the seat or outsidemirrors after they are in theirmemorized position. If you changethe memorized position, theindicator light in the memory buttonwill go out. To keep this drivingposition for later use, you must storeit in the driving position memory.



Your vehicle is equipped with a flip-over center console lid that providesa tray and beverage holders for thesecond row passengers.

Spilled liquids can also damage theupholstery, carpeting, and electricalcomponents in the interior.

To open the front beverage holder,push on the lid.

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Liquid can also spillfrom the rear door pocket beverageholders when you close the reardoors. Use only resealablecontainers in the door pockets.

To open the beverage holder for thesecond row passengers, pull up thecenter lever on the center consoleand lift the lid.To close, pivot the lid forward andpush it down until it latches.

CONTINUED

Beverage Holders


The second row seat also has abeverage holder in the centerarmrest. To use it, pivot the armrestdown.

Second Row Center Armrest Third Row Seat Armrest

Rear Door Pocket

Beverage Holder


The hooks on the floor of the cargoarea enable you to tie down itemsstored in the back. Make sure allstored items are secured beforedriving.

To open the console compartment,pull up on the lever and lift the lid.To close, lower the lid and push itdown until it latches.

Storage compartments are located inthe armrests for the third row seat.To open a compartment, pull thelever and lift the lid. To close, lowerthe lid and push it down until itlatches.

Console Compartment Rear Compartment Cargo Hooks

Console Compartment, Rear Compartment, Cargo Hooks


To use the sun visor, pull it down.You can also use the sun visor at theside window. Remove the supportrod from the clip and swing the sunvisor toward the side window. In thisposition, the sun visor can beextended by sliding out theextension.

To open the sunglasses holder, pushon the front edge. It will unlatch andswing down. To close it, push it untilit latches. Make sure the holder isclosed while you are driving.

Some larger styles of sunglassesmay not fit in the holder.

Sun VisorSunglasses Holder


Sunglasses Holder, Sun Visor

124

EXTENSION

SUN VISOR

CONTINUED

Make sure you put the sun visorback in place when you are gettinginto or out of the vehicle. Do not usethe sun visor extension over the rearview mirror.

To use a vanity mirror on the back ofthe sun visor, pull up the cover.

The light beside the mirror comeson only when the parking lights orheadlights are on.

Your vehicle has three accessorypower sockets. The front accessorypower socket is located under theaudio system. The second socket islocated in the center consolecompartment. The rear socket isbehind the third seat on the driver’sside.

Sun Visor, Vanity Mirror, Accessory Power Sockets


Vanity Mirror Accessory Power Sockets

125

FRONT(Without Rear Entertainment System)

These sockets are intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps).

To use an accessory power socket,the ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).

To use the socket in the consolecompartment, pull the cover up.

None of the sockets will power anautomotive type cigarette lighterelement.

The rear socket has a maximumpower rating of 120 watts (10 amps.)

When both the front and consolesockets are being used, thecombined power rating of bothaccessories should be 120 watts orless (10 amps).

Accessory Power Sockets


FRONT(With Rear Entertainment System)

The coin box is located under theaudio system. To open the coin box,pull the bottom edge. Close it with afirm push.

To use a coat hook, push on the lid.Close it with a firm push.

Make sure the coat hook is closedwhen you are not using it. This hookis not designed for large or heavyitems.

To use this coat hook, rotate thehook down. Close it with a firm push.

Coin Box Coat Hook

Coin Box, Coat Hook


CARGO AREA SECOND ROW

When this switch is in the OFFposition:

None of the lights come on when adoor or the tailgate is opened.

The individual map lights in thefront can be turned on and off withthe switches next to the lights.

The individual map lights in thefront come on when any door orthe tailgate is opened. When thedoors and the tailgate are closed,each light can be turned on and offwith the switch next to the light.

When the switch is in the DoorActivated position:

The cargo area light (3rd row)cannot be turned on.

The individual map lights in thesecond row come on when anydoor or the tailgate is opened.When the doors and the tailgateare closed, each light can beturned on and off with the switchnext to the light.

The light control switch controls theinterior lights: the individual maplights by the sun visors, theindividual map lights above thesecond row passengers, and thecargo area light. This switch hasthree positions: OFF, Door Activated,and ON.

The individual map lights in thesecond row cannot be turned on.

Light Control Switch

Interior Lights


ON

DOORACTIVATEDPOSITION OFF

The cargo area (3rd row) lightcomes on when any door or thetailgate is opened if the switch inthe light is in the door activated(center) position. When the doorsand the tailgate are closed, it canbe turned on with the switch in thelight.

The lights go out about six secondsafter all the doors and the tailgateare closed.

When the switch is in the ONposition:

With the light control switch in theDoor Activated position, all theindividual map lights and the cargoarea light (with the switch in thecenter position) come on when youunlock the door with the remotetransmitter (see page ).

With any door or the tailgate leftopen, the lights stay on about threeminutes, then go out.

All the individual map lights comeon and stay on as long as theswitch remains in the ON position.

The cargo (3rd row) area lightcomes on and stays on if theswitch in the light is in the dooractivated (center) position.95

Interior Lights


This light also works with the lightcontrol switch (see page ).

The cargo area light has a three-position switch. In the OFF position,the light does not come on. In thecenter position, it comes on whenyou open the tailgate or doors. In theON position, it stays on continuously.

Turn on the front and second rowindividual map lights by pushing thebutton next to each light. Push thebutton again to turn it off. You canalso operate these lights with thelight control switch (see page ).128

128

Individual Map Lights Cargo Area Light

Interior Lights


FRONT SECOND ROW

The light in the tailgate has an on-offswitch to control if the light comeson when the tailgate is opened.

The courtesy light in each doorcomes on when the door is opened,and goes out when the door is closed.

Your vehicle also has a courtesy lightin the ignition switch. This lightcomes on when you open the driver’sdoor.It remains on for several secondsafter the door is closed.

Tailgate Light Courtesy Lights

Interior Lights


...............Climate Control System . 134.......Fully-automatic Operation . 136.......Semi-automatic Operation . 137........Mode Button/Mode Icon . 139

Sunlight Sensor/............Temperature Sensor . 141

...........................Rear A/C Unit . 142................................Audio System . 145

AM/FM/Cassette/CD changer........................Audio System . 145

.................Operating the Radio . 146

.................Adjusting the Sound . 149............Audio System Lighting . 149

..............................Digital Clock . 150Operating the Cassette

.....................................Player . 151............Tape Search Functions . 152

.....Operating the CD Changer . 155CD Changer Error

.............................Indications . 162................................Audio System . 163

AM/FM/Cassette/CD Stereo........................Audio System . 163

.................Operating the Radio . 164

.................Adjusting the Sound . 168............Audio System Lighting . 169

....................Radio Frequencies . 169........................Radio Reception . 169

.........Operating the CD Player . 171.....Operating the CD Changer . 173

.......Protecting Compact Discs . 174....CD Player Error Indications . 175

CD Changer Error.............................Indications . 176

Operating the Cassette.....................................Player . 177

............Tape Search Functions . 178Caring for the Cassette

.....................................Player . 180...........Remote Audio Controls . 181

.......................Theft Protection . 182Audio System (Optional on

.....................Touring model) . 183AM/FM/CD/DVD Audio

....................................System . 183.................Operating the Radio . 185.................Adjusting the Sound . 189

..............................Digital Clock . 190............Audio System Lighting . 190

Operating the Cassette.....................................Player . 191

.........Operating the CD Player . 194

.....Operating the CD Changer . 196....CD Player Error Indications . 197

CD Changer Error.............................Indications . 198

........Rear Entertainment System . 199............................Security System . 215

...............................Cruise Control . 216..............................Trip Computer . 219

.(Without Navigation System) . 219HomeLink Universal

.................................Tranceiver . 229.Rear View Camera and Monitor . 234

Comfort and Convenience Features

Comfort and Convenience Features 133

For the climate control system toprovide heating and cooling, theengine must be running.

The automatic climate controlsystem in your Acura picks theproper combination of air condi-tioning, heating, and ventilation tomaintain the interior temperatureyou select. The system also adjuststhe fan speed and air flow levels.

Your vehicle also has a rear A/C unitthat allows the rear passengers toadjust the heating, cooling, and airflow (see page ).

The direction of air flow from thevents in the center and each cornerof the dashboard is adjustable.Move the tab in the center of eachvent up-and-down and side-to-side.

The vents in the corners of thedashboard can be opened and closedwith the dials underneath them.

The climate control system draws airthrough the exterior vents at thebottom of the windshield. Keepthese vents clear of leaves and otherdebris.

142

Climate Control System

Comfort and Convenience Features134

CENTER VENTS CORNER VENT



REAR CENTER VENT

▲

▼

Pressing the OFF button shuts theclimate control system completelyoff. Keep the system completely offonly for short periods. To keep staleair and mustiness from collecting,you should have the fan running atall times.

To put the Automatic ClimateControl in fully-automatic mode,press the AUTO button. Then setthe desired temperature by pressingeither side of the TEMP button:to raise the temperature above thedisplayed value, or to lower thetemperature.

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air that will, as quickly aspossible, raise or lower the interiortemperature from its current level tothe set temperature.

When you set the temperature to itslower limit (60°F/18°C) or its upperlimit (90°F/32°C), the system runsat full cooling or heating only. It doesnot regulate the interior temperature.When the temperature is setbetween the lower and upper limits,the system regulates the interiortemperature to the set value.

In cold weather, the fan will notcome on automatically until thevehicle has been driven for a shorttime and the heater starts to developwarm air.



Fully-automatic Operation

136

TEMPERATURE DISPLAY

AUTO BUTTON REAR A/C CONTROL BUTTON

OFF BUTTON TEMPERATURE BUTTON

CONTINUED

When you turn the A/C off, thesystem cannot regulate the insidetemperature if you set it below theoutside temperature. With the A/Con, use the temperature buttons toadjust the temperature of the airflow to a comfortable setting.

Pressing the A/C button or touchingthe A/C icon turns the airconditioning on and off. You will seeA/C ON or A/C OFF displayed.

You can manually select variousfunctions of the Climate Controlsystem when it is in FULL AUTO.All other features remain auto-matically controlled. Some of thesefunctions appear in the TripComputer/Navigation Systemdisplay. With the Navigation System,press the A/C-Trip button next tothe display to show these functions.



Semi-automatic Operation

Air Conditioning (A/C) Buttons

137

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

TEMPERATURE BUTTONS

(without Navigation System) (with Navigation System)

AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) BUTTON/ICON

This button controls the source ofthe air going into the system. Whenthe indicator above this button is lit,air from the vehicle’s interior is sentthrough the system again (Recircula-tion mode). When the indicator is off,air is brought in from outside thevehicle (Fresh Air mode).You can, for example, manually putthe system in recirculation modewhen driving through an area ofsmoke or fumes.

You can manually select the fanspeed with the fan speed button/fanspeed icon. Pressing the button ortouching the icon repeatedly makesthe fan run faster. The fan speed isshown by bars in the display. If thefan is at its highest speed, pressingthe button or touching the icon againtakes it to its lowest speed.



Recirculation Button

Fan Speed Icon/Fan Speed Button

138

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

TEMPERATURE BUTTONS

FAN SPEED BUTTONMODE BUTTON MODE ICON FAN SPEED ICONS

CONTINUED

Use the MODE Button or MODEicon to select the vents the air flowsfrom. Some air will flow from thedashboard corner vents in all modes.Each time you press the MODEbutton or touch the icon, the displayshows the mode selected. Press(touch) four times to see all themodes.

The main air flow comesfrom the dashboard vents.

The main air flow is dividedbetween the dashboard vents andthe floor vents.

The main air flow comesfrom the floor vents.

The main air flow is dividedbetween the floor vents and de-froster vents at the base of the wind-shield.



Mode Button/Mode Icon

139

The button directs the mainair flow to the windshield for fasterdefrosting. It also overrides anyMODE selection you may have made.

When you turn off bypressing the button again, thesystem returns to its former settings.

When you select , the A/Cturns on automatically and thesystem selects Fresh Air mode. Forfaster defrosting, manually set thefan speed to high. You can alsoincrease air flow to the windshield byclosing the side vents in thedashboard.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger on and off (see page ).88

Rear Window Defogger Button



DEFROST BUTTON

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON

The climate control system has twosensors. A sunlight sensor is locatedin the top of the dashboard and atemperature sensor is next to thesteering column. Do not cover thesensors or spill any liquid on them.

Sunlight Sensor/TemperatureSensor



SUNLIGHT SENSOR

TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Your vehicle has two controls for therear A/C unit. The rear A/C controlbutton is located on the climatecontrol panel, and the rear A/Cpassenger control panel is on theback of the center console.

You can adjust the heating, cooling,and air flow of the rear A/C unit withthese control dials.

Rear A/C Unit



142

REAR A/CCONTROL BUTTON

REAR CENTER VENT REAR A/C PASSENGERCONTROL PANEL

CONTINUED

When the system is in FULL AUTO,the rear A/C passenger controlpanel cannot be used. The systemwill cycle on and off automatically tobring the interior to the settemperature.

To enable the rear A/C passengercontrol panel, press the RR A/CManual button on the control panel.The light in the button will come on.

When the rear A/C passengercontrol panel is enabled, thepassenger in the second row can usethe rear A/C passenger controlpanel to adjust the fan speed and airflow.

The fan speed control dial changesthe speed of the rear fan; turn itclockwise to increase fan speed andair flow.



Rear A/C Passenger Control PanelRear A/C Control Button

Fan Speed Control Dial

143

AUTO BUTTON

REAR A/C CONTROL BUTTON

TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL

MODE BUTTON

FAN SPEEDCONTROL DIAL

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe temperature of the air flow.

Use the MODE buttons to select thevents the air flows from.

With the button selected,heated air flows from the rear lowervents.

With the button selectedcooled air flows from the rear uppervents.



Mode Button

Temperature Control Dial

144

＊

＊

The anti-theft feature will disable thesystem if it is disconnected from thecar’s battery. To get the systemworking again, you must enter acode number (see page ).

Your Acura’s audio system providesclear reception on both AM and FMbands, while the preset buttons allowyou to easily select your favoritestations.

The cassette system features Dolbynoise reduction, automatic sensing ofchromium-dioxide (CrO ) tape, andauto-reverse for continuous play.

The in-dash CD changer holds up tosix discs. You operate the CDchanger with the same controls usedfor the radio. See page for CDchanger operation.

155182

Touring Model

2

Dolby noise reduction manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

Audio System


AM/FM/Cassette/CD ChangerAudio System

145

－

－

○ ○

－

－＋

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the TUNE knob to the right totune to a higher frequency, or to theleft to tune to a lower frequency.Turn the knob right or left until thedisplay reaches the desiredfrequency.

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) tooperate the audio system. Turn thesystem on by pressing the PWR/VOL knob, or the AM or FM button.Adjust the volume by turning theknob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM orFM button. On the FM band, ST willbe displayed if the station is broad-casting in stereo. Stereoreproduction on AM is not available.

You can use any of four methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN or thePreset buttons.

The SEEK functionsearches the band for a station witha strong signal. To activate it, presseither SEEK button ( or ), thenrelease it. Depending on whichSEEK button you press, the systemscans upward or downward from thecurrent frequency. It stops when itfinds a station with a strong signal.

The SCAN functionsamples all the stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it. You will see SCAN inthe display. The system will scan upthe band for a station with a strongsignal. When it finds one, it will stopand play that station forapproximately five seconds. If you donothing, the system will then scanfor the next strong station and playthat for five seconds. When it plays astation that you want to continuelistening to, press the SCAN buttonagain.

TUNE

Operating the Radio

SEEK

SCAN

Audio System


－

The preset frequencies will be lost ifyour car’s battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

Once a station’s frequency is stored,simply press and release the properPreset button to tune to it.

Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a totalof six stations on AM and twelveon FM.

Pick the Preset button you wantfor that station. Press the buttonand hold it until you hear a beep.

Use the TUNE or SEEK functionto tune the radio to a desiredstation.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each presetbutton.

To store a frequency:

You can store thefrequencies of your favorite radiostations in the six preset buttons.Each button will store one frequencyon the AM band, and twofrequencies on the FM band.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Audio System


Preset

147

PWR/VOLKNOB

AMBUTTON

FMBUTTON

STEREOINDICATOR

TUNE KNOB

SCAN BUTTON PRESET BUTTONS SEEK BUTTONS

－ If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive the stations youpreset, you can use the Auto Selectfeature to find stations in the localarea.

If you are in a remote area, AutoSelect may not find six strong AMstations or twelve strong FM stations.If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’displayed when you press any presetbutton that does not have a stationstored.

If you do not like the stations AutoSelect has stored, you can storeother frequencies in the presetbuttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, orSCAN function to find the desiredfrequencies, then store them in theselected preset buttons as describedpreviously.

Auto Select does not erase thefrequencies that you preset pre-viously. When you return home, turnoff Auto Select by pressing theA. SEL button. The preset buttonswill then select the frequencies youoriginally set.

To activate Auto Select, press theA. SEL button. A. SEL will flash inthe display, and the system will gointo scan mode for several seconds.It automatically scans both bands,looking for stations with strongsignals. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM stations and twelve FMstations in the preset buttons. Youcan then use the preset buttons toselect those stations.

AUTO SELECT


Audio System

148

A.SEL INDICATOR TUNE KNOB

SCAN BUTTON PRESETBUTTONS

A.SELBUTTON

SEEK BUTTONS

－

－

Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader areeach adjustable. You select which ofthese you want to adjust by pressingthe TUNE knob. The mode changesfrom BAS to TRE to FAD to BAL,and then back to the selected audiomode, each time you press theTUNE knob.

Use these modes toadjust the tone to your liking. SelectTRE or BAS by pressing the TUNEknob. Adjust the desired mode byturning the TUNE knob. The levelindicators on the display show youthe range.

These twomodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,while FAD adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

Select BAL or FAD by pressing theTUNE knob. Adjust the Balance orFader to your liking by turning theTUNE knob. The level indicators onthe display show you the range.

The system will automatically returnthe display to the selected audiomode about five seconds after youstop adjusting a mode with theTUNE knob.

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control dial to adjust the il-lumination of the audio system (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is turned off.

For information, see page .

82

169

Audio System


Adjusting the Sound

Treble/Bass

Balance/Fader

Audio System Lighting

Radio Frequencies and Reception

149

The audio system display usuallyshows the time when the ignitionswitch is in ACCESSORY (I) or ON(II). It shows the operation mode ofthe radio, cassette player, or CDchanger when you operate them,then goes back to the time displayafter five seconds.

To set the clock, press and hold theCLOCK button until the numberflash. Change the hours by pressingthe H button until the numbersadvance to the desired time. Changethe minutes by pressing the Mbutton until the numbers advance tothe desired time.

You can use R to quickly set the timeto the nearest hour. If the displayedtime is before the half hour, pressingR sets the clock back to the previoushour. If the displayed time is afterthe half hour, pressing R sets theclock forward to the beginning of thenext hour.

For example:

1:06 would RESET to 1:001:52 would RESET to 2:00

When you are finished, press theCLOCK button again.

On vehicles with Navigation System

Audio System


Digital Clock

150

CLOCK BUTTON

H BUTTON

M BUTTON

R BUTTON

▲

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).Make sure the tape opening on thecassette is facing to the right, theninsert the cassette most of the wayinto the slot. The system will pull itin the rest of the way, and begin toplay.

The tape direction indicator will lightto show you which side of thecassette is playing. The indicatesthe side you inserted facing upwardis now playing. If you want to playthe other side, press the PROGbutton.

Dolby noise reduction turns on whenyou insert a cassette. If the tape wasnot recorded with Dolby noise reduc-tion, turn it off by pressing the

button.

Noise reduction remains off until youturn it on by pressing the buttonagain.When the system reaches the end ofthe tape, it will automatically reversedirection and play the other side. Ifyou want to remove the cassettefrom the drive, press the EJECTbutton.

You can remove the cassette withthe ignition switch in any position,even if the audio system is turned off.

If you turn the system off while atape is playing, either with the PWR/VOL knob or by turning off theignition, the cassette will remain inthe drive. When you turn the systemback on, the tape will begin playingwhere it left off.

To switch to the radio or CDchanger while listening to a tape,press the AM, FM or CD button. Tochange back to the cassette player,press the TAPE button.

Operating the Cassette Player

Audio System


－

With a cassette playing, you can usethe FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEATfunction to find a desired program.

Fast Forward andRewind move the tape rapidly. Torewind the tape, push the REWbutton. You will see REW in thedisplay. To fast forward the tape,push the FF button. You will see FFdisplayed. Press the FF, REW orPLAY button to take the system outof rewind or fast forward. When thesystem reaches the end of the tape,it reverses direction and begins toplay.

Tape Search Functions

FF/REW

Audio System


PWR/VOL KNOB TAPE DIRECTIONINDICATOR

CASSETTE SLOT

TAPE EJECTBUTTON

AM BUTTON PLAYBUTTON

PROGBUTTON

FM BUTTON

TAPEBUTTON

DOLBY BUTTON

CD BUTTON

FF BUTTON

REW BUTTON

○ ○

－

○

○

－＋

－

＋

To stop the SKIP function before itfinds the beginning of a song orpassage, press either of the SKIPbuttons ( or ).

The SKIP function allowsyou to find the beginning of a songor passage. To skip to the beginningof a song or passage currentlyplaying, push the button. You willsee REW flashing in the display asthe tape rewinds. To skip to thebeginning of the next song, push the

button. You will see FF flashing inthe display as the tape fast forwards.When the system finds the begin-ning of a song or passage, it goesback to PLAY.

Audio System


SKIP

153

REPEAT INDICATOR

RPT BUTTON

REW BUTTON

FF BUTTON SKIP BUTTONS

－ The Repeat functioncontinuously replays the currentsong or passage. Press the RPTbutton to activate it; you will see RPTdisplayed as a reminder. When thesystem reaches the end of the songor passage currently playing, it willautomatically go into rewind. Whenit senses the beginning of the samesong or passage, the system returnsto PLAY mode. It will continue torepeat this same program until youdeactivate REPEAT by pressing thebutton again.Pressing the REW or FF button, oreither of the SKIP buttons, also turnsoff REPEAT.

The SKIP and REPEAT functionsuse silent periods on the tape to findthe end of a song or passage. Thesefeatures may not work to yoursatisfaction if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel between selections, or a silentperiod in the middle of a selection.

Damaged cassettes can jam insidethe drive or cause other problems.See page for information oncassette care and protection.

180

REPEAT Caring for the Cassette Player


Audio System

154

CONTINUED

Your Acura’s audio system has an in-dash CD changer that holds up to sixdiscs, providing several hours ofcontinuous entertainment. Youoperate this CD changer with thesame controls used for the radio andcassette player.

To load CDs or operate the CDchanger, the ignition switch must bein ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).

Load and play only standard rounddiscs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam inthe drive or cause other problems.You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

For best results when using CD-Rdiscs, use only high quality discslabeled for audio use. Whenrecording a CD-R, the recordingmust be closed in order for the discto be used by CD players. CD-RWdiscs will not work in this unit.

Audio System


Operating the CD Changer

155

LOAD BUTTON

CD EJECT BUTTON

CD SLOT

PWR/VOLKNOB

REPEAT BUTTON

RDM BUTTON CD BUTTON SKIP BUTTONS

To load multiple CDs in oneoperation:

Press and hold the Load buttonuntil you hear a beep and see‘‘_ _ _ _’’ in the display, thenrelease the button.

On the left side of the display, theCD Loaded indicator for an emptyposition will begin blinking.

Repeat this until all six positionsare loaded. The system will thenbegin playing the last CD loaded.

If you are not loading CDs into all sixpositions, press the Load buttonagain after the last CD has loaded.The system will begin playing thelast CD loaded.

If you stop loading CDs before all sixpositions are filled, and you do notpress the Load button, the systemwill wait for ten seconds, then stopthe load operation and begin playingthe last CD loaded.

To load a single CD:

Press and release the Load button.

When the CD Loaded indicator foran empty position starts to blink,and you see LOAd in the display,insert the disc into the CD slot.Insert it only about halfway, thedrive will pull it in the rest of theway.

The system will load the CD, andbegin playing it.When you see LOAd in the display,

insert the disc into the CD slot.Insert it only about halfway, thedrive will pull it in the rest of theway. You will again see the dashesin the display as the CD is loaded.

When LOAd appears again in thedisplay, insert the next disc intothe CD slot. Do no try to insert adisc until LOAd appears. Youcould damage the audio unit.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.

2.

3.

Audio System


Loading CDs in the Changer

156

CONTINUED

If you press the Load button while aCD is playing, the system will stopplaying that CD and start the loadingsequence. It will then play the CDjust loaded.

You can also load a CD into an emptyposition while a CD is playing bypressing the appropriate presetbutton. Select an empty position (theCD Loaded indicator is off), andpress the preset button for thatposition (1 to 6). The system willstop playing the current CD and startthe loading sequence. It will thenplay the CD just loaded.

Audio System


LOAD BUTTON CD LOADEDINDICATOR

FMBUTTON

CD SLOT

AM BUTTON PRESET BUTTONS TAPE BUTTON

－

－

－

○○

○

○

＋－

＋

－

Select the CD changer by pressingthe CD button. You will see ‘‘Cd’’ inthe display. The system will beginplaying the last selected disc in theCD changer. You will see the discand track numbers displayed.

When that disc ends, the next disc inthe CD changer is loaded and played.After the last disc finishes, thesystem returns to disc 1.

To select a different disc, press theappropriate Preset button (1 6). Ifyou select an empty position in theCD changer, the system will go intothe loading sequence (see page ).

You can use the SKIP buttons whilea disc is playing to select passagesand change tracks.

To activate the Repeatfeature, press and release the RPTbutton. You will see RPT in thedisplay as a reminder. The systemcontinuously replays the currenttrack. Press the RPT button again toturn it off. Pressing either of theSKIP buttons also turns off therepeat feature.

This feature,when activated, plays the trackswithin a CD in random order, ratherthan in the order they are recordedon the CD. To activate Random Play,press the RDM button. You will seeRDM in the display. The system willthen select and play tracks randomly.This continues until you deactivateRandom Play by pressing the RDMbutton again, or you select adifferent CD with a preset button.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the appropriate SKIPbutton. You will hear a beep and thesystem will continue to move. Pressthe button to move forward, orthe button to move backward.Release the button when the systemreaches the point you want.

Each time you press the buttonand release it, the system skipsforward to the beginning of the nexttrack. Press and release thebutton to skip backward to thebeginning of the current track. Pressand release it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous track.

156

Audio System


Operation REPEAT

RANDOM PLAY

158

CONTINUED

To take the system out of CD mode,press the AM or FM button, or inserta cassette in the player. If a tape isalready in the cassette player, pressthe TAPE button. When you returnto CD mode by pressing the CDbutton, play will continue at the samepoint that it left off.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or the ignition switch, play willcontinue at the same point when youturn it back on.

Audio System


PWR/VOLKNOB

AM BUTTON FM BUTTON

CDBUTTON

RPTINDICATOR

RDMINDICATOR

RPT BUTTON RDMBUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS SKIP BUTTONS

TAPEBUTTON

To remove the disc that is currentlyplaying, press the eject button. Youwill see ‘‘EJEC’’ in the display. Whenyou remove the disc from the slot,the system automatically begins theLoad sequence so you can loadanother CD in that position. If you donot load another CD, after tenseconds the system begins playingthe next disc in the changer. If thechanger is empty, the system selectsthe previous mode (AM, FM, orTape).

If you do not remove the disc fromthe slot, the system will reload thedisc after ten seconds and beginplaying it.

To remove a different CD from thechanger, first select it with theappropriate preset button. When thatCD begins playing, press the ejectbutton.

Removing CDs from the Changer


Audio System

160

CD EJECT BUTTON CD SLOT

CD BUTTON

If you press the Eject button whilelistening to the radio or tape, or withthe audio system turned off, the discthat was last selected is ejected.After that disc is ejected, pressingthe Eject button again will eject thenext disc in the numerical order. Bydoing this six times, you can removeall the CDs from the changer.

In any mode, if you press the ejectbutton and hold it until you hear abeep, the system will eject all of thediscs in the changer.

You can also eject discs when theignition switch is off. The disc thatwas last selected is ejected first. Youcan eject up to six discs, one at atime.

For information on how to handleand protect compact discs, see page

.174

Audio System


Protecting Compact Discs

161

IndicationIf you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the CDchanger, find the cause in the chartto the right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the vehicle toyour Acura dealer.

Cause Solution

Disc-changermalfunction.High temperature.

Disc-changermalfunction.High temperature.

Consult your Acura dealer.

Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.Consult your Acura dealer.

Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

CD Changer Error Indications

Audio System


The anti-theft feature will disable thesystem if it is disconnected from thevehicle’s battery. To get the systemworking again, you must enter acode number (see page ).


182

Without Touring Package

AM/FM/Cassette/CD StereoAudio System

Audio System


The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM orFM button. On the FM band, ST willbe displayed if the station is broad-casting in stereo. Stereoreproduction on AM is not available.

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) tooperate the audio system. Turn thesystem on by pushing the PWR/VOL knob. Adjust the volume byturning the same knob.

Operating the Radio

Audio System


PWR/VOL KNOB PRESET BUTTONS TUNE KNOB

SCAN BUTTON

AM BUTTON

FM BUTTON SEEK BUTTONS

－

－

－

－

○ ○－＋

The SCAN functionsamples all the stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it. The system will scanup the band for a station with astrong signal. When it finds one, itwill stop and play that station forapproximately five seconds. If you donothing, the system will then scanfor the next strong station and playthat for five seconds. When it plays astation that you want to continuelistening to, press the SCAN buttonagain.

To store a frequency:

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each presetbutton.Use the TUNE or SEEK functionto tune the radio to a desiredstation.Pick the Preset button you wantfor that station. Press the buttonand hold it until you hear a beep.Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a totalof six stations on AM and twelveon FM.

Once a station’s frequency is stored,simply press and release the properpreset button to tune to it.


Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob clockwise to tune to ahigher frequency, orcounterclockwise to tune to a lowerfrequency.

The preset frequencies will be lost ifyour vehicle’s battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.


The SEEK functionsearches the band for a station witha strong signal. To activate it, presseither SEEK button ( or ), thenrelease it. Depending on whichSEEK button you press, the systemscans upward or downward from thecurrent frequency. It stops when itfinds a station with a strong signal.

1.

2.

3.

4.

SCAN

TUNE

Preset

SEEK

Audio System


－ If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive the stations youpreset, you can use the Auto Selectfeature to find stations in the localarea.



AUTO SELECT

Audio System


A.SEL INDICATOR

A.SEL BUTTON




Audio System

167

TUNE KNOB

SCAN BUTTON PRESET BUTTONS SEEK BUTTONS

－

－

These twocontrols adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.The Balance control adjusts the side-to-side strength, while the Fadercontrol adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

To adjust the fader, push on theBASS/FADER control knob to get itto pop out. Pull it out slightly farther,and adjust the front-to-back sound toyour liking. Push the knob back inwhen you are done so you cannotchange the setting by accidentallybumping it.

To adjust the balance, push on theTREBLE/BALANCE control knobto get it to pop out. Pull it out slightlyfarther, and adjust the side-to-sidesound to your liking. Push the knobback in when you are done so youcannot change the setting byaccidentally bumping it.

Use these controlsto adjust the tone to your liking.

To adjust the Treble level, push onthe TREBLE/BALANCE controlknob to get it to pop out. Withoutpulling it out farther, turn the knobto adjust the treble level. Push theknob back in when you are done soyou cannot change the setting byaccidentally bumping it.

To adjust the Bass level, push on theBASS/FADER control knob to get itto pop out. Without pulling it outfarther, turn the knob to adjust thebass level. Push the knob back inwhen you are done so you cannotchange the setting by accidentallybumping it.

Adjusting the SoundBalance/Fader

Treble/Bass

Audio System


BASS/FADERCONTROL

TREBLE/BALANCECONTROL

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control knob to adjust theillumination of the audio system (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is turned off.

Your Acura’s radio can receive thecomplete AM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band:530 to 1,710 kilohertzFM band:87.7 to 107.9 megahertz

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least tenkilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).Stations on the FM band areassigned frequencies at least 0.2megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

How well your Acura’s radio receivesstations is dependent on manyfactors, such as the distance fromthe station’s transmitter, nearbylarge objects, and atmosphericconditions.

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator will

go off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

82

Audio System Lighting

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception


Audio System

169

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

Audio System


You operate the CD player with thesame controls used for the radio.

With the system on, insert the discinto the CD slot. Push the disc inhalfway, the drive will pull it in therest of the way and begin to play.The number of the track that isplaying is shown in the display.

You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discswithout using an adapter ring. In allcases, play only standard round discs.Odd-shaped CDs may jam in thedrive or cause other problems.


Operating the CD Player

Audio System


CD SLOT SKIP BUTTONS

REPEAT BUTTON CD BUTTON RDM BUTTON

－○

○

－

○

○

＋－

＋

－

You can use the SKIP buttons whilea disc is playing to select passagesand change tracks.

This feature,when activated, plays the tracks onthe CD in random order, rather thanin the order they are recorded on theCD. To activate Random Play, pressthe RDM button. You will see RDMin the display. The system will thenselect and play tracks randomly.This continues until you deactivateRandom Play by pressing the RDMbutton again.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold an appropriate SKIP button.Press the button to move forward,or the button to move backward.Release the button when the systemreaches the point you want.

To activate the Repeatfeature, press and release the Repeatbutton. You will see REPEAT in thedisplay. The system continuouslyreplays the current track. Press theRepeat button again to turn it off.

Each time you press the buttonand release it, the system skipsforward to the beginning of the nexttrack. Press and release thebutton to skip backward to thebeginning of the current track. Pressand release it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous track.

When the system reaches the end ofthe disc, it will return to the begin-ning and play the disc again.

You can switch to the radio while aCD is playing by pressing the AM orFM button. Press the CD button toreturn to playing the CD. The CDwill begin playing where it left off.

If you eject the disc, but do notremove it from the slot, the systemwill automatically reload the discafter 15 seconds and put the CDplayer in pause mode. To beginplaying the disc, press the CD button.

Press the eject button to remove thedisc from the drive.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or by turning off the ignition,the disc will stay in the drive. Whenyou turn the system back on, the CDwill begin playing where it left off.

RANDOM PLAY

REPEAT

Audio System


－

A Compact Disc changer is availablefor your vehicle. It holds up to sixdiscs, providing several hours ofcontinuous entertainment. Youoperate this CD changer with thesame controls used for the in-dashCD player.

Load the desired CDs in themagazine and load the magazine inthe changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.Play only standard round discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the drive orcause other problems.

If you eject the in-dash CD while it isplaying, the system will automaticallyswitch to the CD changer and beginplay where it left off. If there are noCDs in the changer, the display willflash. You will have to select anothermode (AM or FM) with the FM orAM button.


To select the CD changer, press theCD button. The disc and tracknumbers will be displayed.

To select a different disc, press theappropriate preset button (1 6). Ifyou select an empty slot in themagazine, the changer will, afterfinding that slot empty, try to loadthe CD in the next slot. Thiscontinues until it finds a CD to loadand play.

If you load a CD in the in-dash playerwhile the changer is playing a CD,the system will stop the changer andbegin playing the in-dash CD. Toselect the changer again, press theCD button. Play will begin where itleft off. Use the CD button to switchbetween the player and the changer.

When you switch back to CD mode,the system selects the same unit (in-dash or changer) that was playingwhen you switched out of CD mode.

To use the SKIP, REPEAT, andRANDOM functions, refer to the in-dash player operating instructions.

Operating the CD Changer(Optional)

Audio System


Never try to insert foreign objects inthe CD player or the magazine.

A new CD may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on the re-cording surface of the disc, causingskipping or other problems. Removethese pieces by rubbing the innerand outer edges with the side of apencil or pen.

Handle a CD by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the CD.These, along with contaminationfrom fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tippens, can cause the CD to not playproperly, or possibly jam in the drive.

When a CD is not being played, storeit in its case to protect it from dustand other contamination. To preventwarpage, keep CDs out of directsunlight and extreme heat.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the disc from the centerto the outside edge.


Audio System


If you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the CDplayer, find the cause in the chart tothe right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the vehicle toyour Acura dealer.

Indication Cause Solution

FOCUS/CLV ErrorData Read ErrorSearch Error

Mechanical Error

Control ErrorLSI Error

Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CDplayer.Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation.If the CD cannot be pulled out or the errorindication does not disappear after the disc isejected, see your Acura dealer.Do not try to force the disc out of the player.Consult your Acura dealer.

CD Player Error Indications

Audio System


If you see an error indication in thedisplay while in CD mode, find thecause in the chart to the right. If youcannot clear the error indication,take the vehicle to your Acura dealer.


Disc-changermalfunction.Disc is in changermechanism.Disc-changermalfunction.

Disc-changermalfunction.

CD magazine ejectionimpossible.High temperature.

Misconnection ordisconnection of CDchanger.No CD magazine in theCD changer.No CD in magazine.

Consult your Acura dealer.

Press the magazine eject button, and insert anempty magazine.If the code disappears within a few seconds,unit is OK. If it does not, consult your Acuradealer.Press the magazine eject button and pull outthe magazine, check for error indication. Insertthe magazine again. If the magazine can not bepulled out, consult your Acura dealer.Press the magazine eject button. If the maga-zine does not eject, consult your Acura dealer.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

See your Acura dealer.

Insert CD magazine.

Insert CD in magazine.


Audio System


＊

＊

The cassette system features Dolbynoise reduction, automatic sensing ofchromium-dioxide (CrO ) tape, andauto-reverse for continuous play.

Make sure the tape opening on thecassette is facing to the right, theninsert the cassette most of the wayinto the slot. The system will pull itin the rest of the way, and begin toplay.

2




Audio System


PLAYBUTTON

REWBUTTON

FF BUTTON

DOLBY BUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON

PROG BUTTON CD BUTTON

SKIP BUTTONS

▲

－

The tape direction indicator will lightto show you which side of thecassette is playing. The indicatesthe side you inserted facing upwardis now playing. If you want to playthe other side, press the PROGbutton.

Dolby noise reduction turns on whenyou insert a cassette. If the tape wasnot recorded with Dolby noisereduction, turn it off by pressing theNR button.

When the system reaches the end ofthe tape, it will automatically reversedirection and play the other side. Ifyou want to remove the cassettefrom the drive, press the EJECTbutton.



Fast Forward and Re-wind move the tape rapidly. To re-wind the tape, push the REW button.You will see REW in the display. Tofast forward the tape, push the FFbutton. You will see FF displayed.Press the PLAY button to take thesystem out of rewind or fast forward.If the system reaches the end of thetape while in fast forward or rewind,it automatically stops that function,reverses direction, and begins to play.

To switch to the radio or CD playerwhile a tape is playing, press the AM,FM or CD button. To change back tothe cassette player, push the TAPEbutton.


FF/REW

Audio System


－－

○

○

－

＋


The Repeat functioncontinuously replays the currentsong or passage. Press the REPEATbutton to activate it; you will seeREPEAT displayed as a reminder.When the system reaches the end ofthe song or passage currentlyplaying, it will automatically go intorewind. When it senses thebeginning of the same song orpassage, the system returns to PLAYmode. It will continue to repeat thissame program until you deactivateREPEAT by pressing the buttonagain.

The SKIP function allowsyou to find the beginning of a songor passage. To skip to the beginningof a song or passage currentlyplaying, push the button. You willsee REW flashing in the display asthe tape rewinds. To skip to thebeginning of the next song, push the

button. You will see FF flashing inthe display as the tape fast forwards.When the system finds the begin-ning of a song or passage, it goesback to PLAY.

REPEATSKIP

Audio System


The cassette player picks up dirt andoxides from the tape. This contami-nation builds up over time andcauses the sound quality to degrade.To prevent this, you should clean theplayer after every 30 hours of use.Your dealer has a cleaning kitavailable.

If you do not clean the cassetteplayer regularly, it may eventuallybecome impossible to remove thecontamination with a normalcleaning kit.

Use 100-minute or shorter cassettes.Cassettes longer than that usethinner tape that may break or jamthe drive.

Look at the cassette before youinsert it. If the tape is loose, tightenit by turning a hub with a pencil oryour finger.

When they are not in use, storecassettes in their cases to protectthem from dust and moisture. Neverplace cassettes where they will beexposed to direct sunlight, high heat,or high humidity. If a cassette isexposed to extreme heat or cold, letit reach a moderate temperaturebefore inserting it in the player.

Never try to insert foreign objectsinto the cassette player.

If the label is peeling off, remove itfrom the cassette or it could causethe cassette to jam in the player.Never try to insert a warped ordamaged cassette in the player.

Caring for the Cassette Player

Audio System


▲ ▼The middle button adjusts thevolume up ( ) or down ( ). Pressthe top or bottom of the button andhold it until the desired volume isreached, then release it.

The CH button has three functions,depending on whether you arelistening to the radio, or playing acassette or CD.

If you are listening to the radio, usethe CH button to change stations.Each time you press this button, thesystem advances to the next presetstation on the band you are listeningto. You will see the number of theselected Preset button in the display.To change bands, or to change fromFM1 to FM2, press the AM/FMbutton.

If you are playing a cassette, use theCH button to advance to the nextselection. You will see ‘‘FF’’ blinkingin the display when you press the CHbutton. The system fast forwardsuntil it senses a silent period, thengoes back to PLAY.

If you are playing a CD, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack each time you push the CHbutton. You will see the disc andtrack number in the display.

Three controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

Remote Audio Controls

Audio System


CH BUTTON

VOLUMEBUTTON

AM/FMBUTTON

You will have to store your favoritestations in the Preset buttons afterthe system begins working. Youroriginal settings were lost whenpower was disconnected.

If your vehicle’s battery is discon-nected or goes dead, the audiosystem will disable itself. If thishappens, you will see ‘‘Code’’ in thefrequency display the next time youturn on the system. Use the Presetbuttons to enter the five-digit code. Ifit is entered correctly, the radio willstart playing.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over or try tocorrect your mistake. Complete thefive-digit sequence, then enter thecorrect code. You have ten tries toenter the correct code. If you areunsuccessful in ten attempts, youmust then leave the system on forone hour before trying again.

Your vehicle’s audio system willdisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, the usermust enter a specific five-digit codein the Preset buttons. Because thereare hundreds of numbercombinations possible from fivedigits, making the system workwithout knowing the exact code isnearly impossible.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system’s codenumber and serial number. It is bestto store this card in a safe place athome. In addition, you should writethe audio system’s serial number inthis Owner’s Manual. If you shouldhappen to lose the card, you mustobtain the code number from yourAcura dealer. To do this, you willneed the system’s serial number.

Theft Protection

Audio System


＊

＊

CONTINUED

The cassette system features Dolbynoise reduction, automatic sensing ofchromium-dioxide (CrO ) tape, andautoreverse for continuous play.

The anti-theft feature will disable thesystem if it is disconnected from thevehicle’s battery. To get the systemworking again, you must enter acode number (see page ).


182

2



Optional on U.S. Touring model only

Audio System


AM/FM/CD/DVD Audio system

183

This system also has a rearentertainment system that allows therear passengers to listen throughwireless headhones to differentprogramming than the front seatoccupants. A built-in DVD playerallows the rear passengers to watchDVDs or video CDs. To operate thispart of the system, refer to RearEntertainment System on page .

The front control panel has twodisplays. The left display shows theinformation for the front part of thesystem.

When the rear system is on, theright display shows the informationfor the rear part of the system.

199

Audio System


FRONT SYSTEM DISPLAY REAR SYSTEM DISPLAY

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) tooperate the audio system. Turn thesystem on by pushing the PWR/VOL knob. Adjust the volume byturning the same knob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton. On the FM band, ST will bedisplayed if the station is broadcast-ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction onAM is not available.

CONTINUED

Operating the Radio

Audio System


SCANINDICATOR

AM/FMBUTTON

SCANBUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

STEREOINDICATOR

TUNE KNOB

PWR/VOLKNOB

SEEK BAR

－

－

－

－－＋


Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the TUNE knob to the right totune to a higher frequency, or to theleft to tune to a lower frequency.Turn the knob right or left until thedisplay reaches the desiredfrequency.

The SEEK functionsearches the band for a station witha strong signal. To activate it, pressthe SEEK bar or , thenrelease it. Depending on which partof the SEEK bar you press, thesystem scans upward or downwardfrom the current frequency. It stopswhen it finds a station with a strongsignal.

The SCAN functionsamples all the stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it. When the system isin the SCAN mode, SCN shows inthe display. The system will scan upthe band for a station with a strongsignal. When it finds one, it will stopand play that station forapproximately five seconds. If you donothing, the system will then scanfor the next strong station and playthat for five seconds. When it plays astation that you want to continuelistening to, press the SCAN buttonagain.


To store a frequency:Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each presetbutton.

Use the TUNE or SEEK functionto tune the radio to a desiredstation.

Pick the Preset button you wantfor that station. Press the buttonand hold it until you hear a beep.

Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a totalof six stations on AM and twelveon FM.

Once a station’s frequency is stored,simply press and release the properPreset button to tune to it. Thepreset frequencies will be lost if yourvehicle’s battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

1.

2.

3.

4.


Audio System

TUNE

SEEK

SCAN

Preset

186

－

CONTINUED

If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive the stations youpreset, you can use the Auto Selectfeature to find stations in the localarea.



Audio System


AUTO SELECT

187

A.SELINDICATOR

PRESET BUTTONSA.SEL BUTTON

AM/FMBUTTON



Audio System


A.SELINDICATOR

SCANBUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS SEEK BARA.SEL BUTTON

AM/FMBUTTON

TUNE KNOB

－

－

Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader areeach adjustable. You select which ofthese you want to adjust by pressingthe TUNE knob. The mode changesfrom BAS to TRE to FAD to BAL,and then back to the selected audiomode, each time you press theTUNE knob.

Use these modes toadjust the tone to your liking. SelectTRE or BAS by pressing the TUNEknob. Adjust the selected mode byturning the TUNE knob. Thedisplayed number shows you thecurrent setting.

These twomodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,while FAD adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

Select BAL or FAD by pressing theTUNE knob. Adjust the Balance orFader to your liking by turning theTUNE knob. The displayed numbershows you the current setting. Whenthe adjustment level reaches thecenter, you will see ‘‘ ’’.

The system will automatically returnthe display to the selected audiomode about five seconds after youstop adjusting a mode with theTUNE knob.

C

Audio System


Adjusting the Sound

Treble/Bass

Balance/Fader

189

TUNE KNOB

ADJUSTMENT LEVEL

－

＋

To set the clock, press and hold theSET (TUNE) button until thenumbers flash. Change the hours bypressing the H ( ) button until thenumbers advance to the desired time.Change the minutes by pressing theM ( ) button until the numbersadvance to the desired time. Whenyou are finished, press the SETbutton again.

The right display usually shows thetime when the ignition is inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II). Itshows the operation mode of theradio, cassette player, CD player, orrear entertainment system when youoperate them, then goes back to thetime display after five seconds.

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control dial to adjust the il-lumination of the audio system (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is turned off.

For information, see page .

82

169

On vehicles with Navigation System


Audio System

Digital Clock

Audio System Lighting Radio Frequencies and Reception

190

SETBUTTON

H BUTTON M BUTTON

▲

CONTINUED

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).Make sure the tape opening on thecassette is facing to the right, theninsert the cassette most of the wayinto the slot. The system will pull itin the rest of the way, and begin toplay.

The tape direction indicator will lightto show you which side of thecassette is playing. The indicatesthe side you inserted facing upwardis now playing. If you want to playthe other side, press the PROG( ) button.

Dolby noise reduction turns on whenyou insert a cassette. The indi-cator will light in the display. If thetape was not recorded with Dolbynoise reduction, turn it off bypressing the button.

Audio System



191

DOLBYINDICATOR

CASSETTESLOT

TAPEBUTTON

PROG BUTTONPWR/VOL KNOB

TAPE DIRECTIONINDICATOR

TAPE EJECTBUTTON

Noise reduction remains off until youturn it on by pressing the buttonagain.

When the system reaches the end ofthe tape, it will automatically reversedirection and play the other side. Ifyou want to remove the cassettefrom the drive, press the EJECTbutton.

You can remove the cassette withthe ignition switch in any position,even if the audio system is turned off.


To switch to the radio, CD player, orCD changer, press the AM/FM orCD/CHG button. To change back tothe cassette player, press the TAPEbutton.

Audio System


CASSETTE SLOT CD/CDG BUTTON

RPTBUTTON

REWBUTTON

TAPEEJECTBUTTON

SEEK BARFF BUTTON

PLAY/PROG BUTTON

PWR/VOLKNOB

AM/FMBUTTON

－

－

－

＋

－＋

－


Fast Forward andRewind move the tape rapidly. Torewind the tape, push the

button. You will see REW inthe display. To fast forward the tape,push the button. You will seeFF displayed. Press the ,

or PLAY/PROG button totake the system out of rewind or fastforward. When the system reachesthe end of the tape, it reversesdirection and begins to play.

The Skip function allowsyou to find the beginning of a songor passage. To skip to the beginningof a song or passage currentlyplaying, push the side of the SKIPbar. You will see REW flashing in thedisplay as the tape rewinds. To skipto the beginning of the next song,

push the side of the SKIP bar.You will see FF flashing in thedisplay as the tape fast forwards.When the system finds thebeginning of a song or passage, itgoes back to PLAY.

To stop the SKIP function before itfinds the beginning of a song orpassage, press either side of theSKIP bar ( or ).

The Repeat functioncontinuously replays the currentsong or passage. Press the RPTbutton to activate it; you will see RPTdisplayed as a reminder. When thesystem reaches the end of the songor passage currently playing, it willautomatically go into rewind. Whenit senses the beginning of the samesong or passage, the system returnsto PLAY mode. It will continue torepeat this same program until youdeactivate REPEAT by pressing thebutton again.

Pressing the orbutton, or either side of the

SKIP bar, also turns off REPEAT.


Damaged cassettes can jam insidethe drive or cause other problems.See page for information oncassette care and protection.

180

Audio System



FF/REW

SKIP

REPEATCaring for the Cassette Player

193

You operate the CD player with thesame controls used for the radio.

With the ignition switch inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II), insertthe disc into the CD slot. Push thedisc in halfway, the drive will pull itin the rest of the way and begin toplay. The number of the track that isplaying is shown in the display.

You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discswithout using an adapter ring. Playonly standard round discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the drive orcause other problems.


Audio System


Operating the CD Player

194

RPTBUTTON

CD SLOT CD EJECT BUTTONPWR/VOL KNOB

CD BUTTON SKIP BARRDM BUTTON

－

－＋

－

＋

－

When the system reaches the end ofthe disc, it will return to the begin-ning and play the disc again.

You can switch to the radio while aCD is playing by pressing the AM/FM button. Press the CD button toreturn to playing the CD. The CDwill begin playing where it left off.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or by turning off the ignition,the disc will stay in the drive. Whenyou turn the system back on, the CDwill begin playing where it left off.

Press the eject button to remove thedisc from the drive.

If you eject the disc, but do notremove it from the slot, the systemwill automatically reload the discafter 15 seconds and put the CDplayer in pause mode. To beginplaying the disc, press the CD button.

You can use the SEEK/SKIP barwhile a disc is playing to selectpassages and change tracks.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the SEEK/SKIP bar. Pressthe side to move forward. Youwill see CUE in the display. Press the

side to move backward. Youwill see REW displayed. Release thebar when the system reaches thepoint you want.

Each time you press and release theside of the SEEK/SKIP bar,

the system skips forward to thebeginning of the next track. Pressand release the side to skipbackward to the beginning of thecurrent track. Press it again to skipto the beginning of the previoustrack.

To activate the Repeatfeature, press and release the RPTbutton. You will see RPT in thedisplay. The system continuouslyreplays the current track. Press theRPT button again to turn it off.

This feature,when activated, plays the tracks onthe CD in random order, rather thanin the order they are recorded on theCD. To activate Random Play, pressand release the A. SEL/RDM button.You will see RDM in the display. Thesystem will then select and playtracks randomly. This continuesuntil you deactivate Random Play bypressing A. SEL/RDM again.

Audio System


REPEAT

RANDOM PLAY

195

－＋

A Compact Disc changer is availablefor your vehicle. It holds up to sixdiscs, providing several hours ofcontinuous entertainment. Youoperate this CD changer with thesame controls used for the in-dashCD player.

Load the desired CDs in themagazine and load the magazine inthe changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.Play only standard round discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the drive orcause other problems.


To select the CD changer, press theCD button. The disc and tracknumbers will be displayed.

To select a different disc, use thePreset 5 (DISC ) or Preset 6(DISC ) button. Press the Preset 6button to select the next disc in themagazine. Press the Preset 5 buttonto select the previous disc. If youselect an empty slot in the magazine,the changer will, after finding thatslot empty, try to load the CD in thenext slot. This continues until it findsa CD to load and play.

If you load a CD in the in-dash playerwhile the changer is playing a CD,the system will stop the changer andbegin playing the in-dash CD. Toselect the changer again, press theCD button. Play will begin where itleft off. Use the CD button to switchbetween the player and the changer.

If you eject the in-dash CD while it isplaying, the system will automaticallyswitch to the CD changer and beginplay where it left off. If there are noCDs in the changer, the display willflash. You will have to select anothermode (Radio or Cassette Player).

When you switch back to CD mode,the system selects the same unit (in-dash or changer) that was playingwhen you switched out of CD mode.

To use the SKIP, REPEAT, andRANDOM functions, refer to the in-dash player operating instructions.

For information on how to handleand protect compact discs, see page

.174

Audio System


Operating the CD Changer(Optional)


196

IndicationIf you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the CDplayer, find the cause in the chart tothe right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the vehicle toyour Acura dealer.

Cause Solution

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error or aDVD has been loaded inthe CD player

High Temperature

Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CDplayer.Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation.If the CD cannot be pulled out or the errorindication does not disappear after the disc isejected, see your Acura dealer.Do not try to force the disc out of the player.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

CD Player Error Indications

Audio System


If you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the CDchanger, find the cause in the chartto the right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the vehicle toyour Acura dealer.


FOCUS Error

No CD in the CDmagazine

Mechanical Error

High Temperature

No CD magazinein theCD changer

Press the magazine eject button and pull outthe magazine, check for error indication. Insertthe magazine again. If the code does notdisappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,consult your Acura dealer.Insert CD.

Press the magazine eject button and pull outthe magazine, check for error indication. Insertthe magazine again. If the code does notdisappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,consult your Acura dealer.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.Insert CD magazine.

Audio System



198

CONTINUED

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) tooperate the Rear EntertainmentSystem.

Turn on the rear system by pressingthe REAR PWR button. The rearentertainment system can then beoperated from the front control panel,the rear control panel on the ceiling,or with the remote control. The rightdisplay then shows the informationfor the rear system.

Your Acura is equipped with a RearEntertainment System that includesa DVD player for the enjoyment ofthe rear passengers. With thissystem, the rear passengers canenjoy a different entertainmentsource (radio, cassette player, CDplayer or DVD player) than the frontseat occupants.

Optional on U.S. Touring model only


Rear Entertainment System

199

REAR PWRBUTTON

When the rear system is turned on, itselects the entertainment source itwas last set to. If that source hasbeen removed (the DVD has beenejected from the player, for example),you will see ‘‘_ _ _ _’’ in the display.You must select another source.

When you turn on the rear system,the rear speakers are automaticallyturned off. You will see the RearSpeakers Off icon in the right display.The sound for the rear system issent to the wireless headphones. Ifyou want to turn the rear speakerson again, press and hold the REARPWR button until they come on.

NOTE: The rear speakers areconnected to the front system, sothey will always play the source thatthe front system is set to. Forexample, if you are listening to theradio, and your rear passengers arelistening to a CD through theheadphones, the rear speakers will

play the radio when you turn themon. To have the vehicle speakersplay the CD, change the front sourcefrom AM/FM to CD.

Pressing the RR CTRL selector knobturns off the rear controls. Your

passengers are not able to operatethe rear system with the controlpanel in the ceiling or with theremote control. You will see the RearControls Off icon in the right display.Press the selector knob again to turnthe rear controls back on.



200

REAR PWRBUTTON

REAR CONTROLSOFF ICON

REAR SPEAKERSOFF ICON

RR CTRLSELECTOR KNOB

＊

＊

The DVD player in your RearEntertainment System can play DVDvideo discs and CDs. It featuresDolby noise reduction. The videoscreen is designed for use by therear seat passengers only.The driver and front seat passengershould not try to view the screenwhile driving.

Open the overhead screen bypushing on the button. The screenwill swing down part-way. Pivot thescreen the rest of the way. If youpivot the screen too far forward, pastthe detent, the display will turn off.Pivot the screen back to the detentto turn the display back on. To closethe screen, pivot it up until it latches.

The DVD player is located under thefront control panel. Insert the discinto the DVD slot. Push the disc inhalfway, the drive will pull it in therest of the way.Press the eject button to remove thedisc from the drive.

Follow the instructions on thefollowing pages to operate the DVDplayer from the front control panel,the rear control panel, or with theremote control.





Rear Video Operation

201

REAR CONTROLPANEL

BUTTON

OVERHEADSCREEN

DVD SLOT EJECTBUTTON

To operate the rear entertainmentsystem from the front panel, youmust first push on the rear powerbutton, then turn the RR CTRL knobclockwise to enable the panel. Theamber RR LED will come on to showthat the control panel is now enabled.

To return front panel control to thefront audio system, turn the knobcounterclockwise. The system willautomatically change back to thefront system several seconds afteryou stop pressing the buttons.



Operating the DVD Player fromthe Front Control Panel

202

RR CTRL SELECTORKNOB

RR LED

RPTBUTTON

REAR PWRBUTTON

PLAYBUTTON

RDMBUTTON

PAUSEBUTTON

SEEK/SKIPBAR

＋

－

＋

－

－

Some DVDs start playingautomatically after the disc is loadedcompletely. If a disc does not startplaying, press the PLAY button. Ifthe system is in PAUSE mode, pressthe PLAY button to cancel thePAUSE mode.

Press the PAUSE button to pausethe disc. Press the button again orpress the PLAY button to return toPLAY. PAUSE works only withDVDs.

You can move rapidly within a trackor a chapter by pressing the SEEK/SKIP bar. Press and hold the sideto move forward, You will see ‘‘CUE’’in the display. Press and hold theside to move backward, You will see‘‘REV’’ in the display. Release thebutton when the system reaches thepoint you want.

Each time you press and release theside of the SEEK/SKIP button,

the system skips forward to thebeginning of the next track orchapter. Press and release theside of the button to skip backwardto the beginning of the current trackor chapter. If you press the side ofthe button while the beginning of atrack or chapter is playing, thesystem skips to the beginning of theprevious track or chapter.

Press the RPT button tocontinuously replay the current track.You will see RPT in the display.Press the button again to turn it off.RPT works only with CDs.

To play the tracks within a CD inrandom order, press the RDMbutton. You will see RDM in thedisplay. Press the button again tocancel RDM. RDM works only withCDs.



PLAY Button

PAUSE Button

SEEK/SKIP Bar RPT Button

RDM Button

203

▲ ▼

You can control some DVD functionsfrom the rear control panel in theceiling Make sure the rear controloperation has not been disabled withthe RR CTRL knob on the frontpanel.

Use these buttons to select theentertainment source (radio,cassette player, CD player/CDchanger, or DVD player/Auxiliarydevice). The selected source will beshown in the display.

Press this button when you want topause a DVD. Press this buttonagain to go back to Play. To select the menu on the DVD,

press the MENU button. Use the, , , and buttons to

move to the desired menu selection,then press the ENT button to enteryour selection.

Press the button to skip to thebeginning of the next chapter. Pressthe button to skip back to the

beginning of the current chapter.If you press the button while thebeginning of a chapter is playing, thesystem skips to the beginning of theprevious chapter.



Operating the DVD Player fromthe Rear Control Panel

Source Selection Buttons

PLAY/PAUSE/PROG Button

MENU/ENT Buttons

SEEK/SKIP Buttons

204

SOURCE SELECTIONBUTTONS

MENUBUTTON

REAR CONTROLSOFF BUTTON

CH/DISKBUTTON

SEEK/SKIPBUTTON

SEEK/SKIPBUTTON

CH/DISKBUTTON

ENT BUTTONPLAY/PAUSE/PROGBUTTON

CONTINUED

You can control all of the DVDfunctions with the remote control.Make sure the rear control operationhas not been disabled with the RRCTRL knob on the front panel.

When using the remote control,point it at the rear control panel inthe ceiling.

Press this button to start playing aDVD.

Use these buttons to select theentertainment source (radio,cassette player, CD player/CDchanger, or DVD player/Auxiliarydevice). The selected source will beshown in the display.



Operating the DVD Player withthe Remote Control

Source Selection Buttons

PLAY/PROG Button

205

SOURCE SELECTIONBUTTONS

REW/FWD BUTTONS

STOP BUTTON

PAUSE BUTTON

PLAY/PROG BUTTON

MENU BUTTON

SUBTITLE BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

ANGLE BUTTON

TITLE BUTTON

SEEK/SKIP BUTTONS

DISP BUTTON

RETURN (T/C) BUTTON

Press this button when you want topause a DVD. Press this buttonagain to go back to Play.

Some DVDs have menus that allowyou to select a dubbed language,subtitles, a chapter list, previews, etc.The menu contents will vary fromDVD to DVD.

Press the MENU button to displaythe DVD’s main menu. Use the ,

, , and buttons to selectthe desired menu option. Then pressENT to enter your selection.

If the menu has more than one page,use the and buttonsto change pages.

You can also use the numberedbuttons to enter the number of amenu option. You do not have topress ENT, the option will beselected when you complete thenumber. Make sure you enter twodigits. If the option number is lessthan 10, enter a ‘‘0’’ first.

Some DVDs have a title menu. Thecontents of the menu vary fromDVD to DVD.

Press the TITLE button to displaythe title menu window. Move yourselection by pressing the , ,

and buttons. Enter yourselection by pressing the ENTbutton. If the menu has more thanone page, use the and

buttons to change pages.Press the TITLE button again toclose the window.

Many DVDs are recorded withsubtitles, sometimes in multiplelanguages. To select subtitles, pressthe SUBTITLE button. Continue topress and release the SUBTITLEbutton to scan through the availablelanguages.

Press this button to stop playing aDVD.

Press the button to skip to thebeginning of the next chapter. Pressthe button to skip back to thebeginning of the current chapter.

Press the button to moveforward rapidly within a chapter. Youwill see CUE in the display. Press the

button to move backwardrapidly within a chapter. You will seeREV in the display. Release thebutton when the system reaches thepoint you want.



PAUSE Button MENU Button TITLE Button

SUBTITLE Button

STOP Button

SKIP Buttons

FWD/REW Buttons

206

Many DVDs are recorded, ordubbed, in more than one language.To select a different language thanthe one being heard, press theAUDIO button. Continue to pressand release the AUDIO button tohear all the available languages.

To change the color, contrast, aspectratio, and brightness of the videoscreen, press the DISP button. Thecurrent setting of one will bedisplayed on the screen each timeyou press the button. Use the

and buttons to change thesetting as desired. The display willdisappear from the screen severalseconds after you stop adjusting thesetting.

On some DVDs, the scenes arerecorded by more than one camera,giving different viewpoints of thesame scene. By pressing the Anglebutton, you can select a differentviewpoint.

In the MENU selection mode,pressing the RETURN button forless than two seconds changes theMENU display to the previous page.Pressing the RETURN button formore than two seconds while a DVDis playing brings the system into theTITLE enter mode. When you enteryour selection, the DVD player willstart playing from the selected title.



AUDIO Button

DISP Button

ANGLE Button

RETURN (T/C) Button

207

The tips on how to handle andprotect DVDs are basically the sameas those for compact discs. Refer to‘‘Protecting Compact Discs’’ on page

.

There are various types of DVDsavailable. Some of them are notcompatible with your system.

The DVD player in your RearEntertainment System can play DVDvideo discs and CDs bearing theabove marks on their packages orjackets.

Those packages or jackets shouldalso bear the area designation of ‘‘1’’or ‘‘ALL’’.

DVD-ROMs cannot be played in thissystem.

174



Protecting DVDsPlayable DVDs

208

Indication Cause SolutionIf you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the DVDplayer, find the cause in the chart tothe right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the vehicle toyour Acura dealer.

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

High Temperature

Low Vehicle BatteryVoltage

Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.Check if the disc is inserted correctly in theDVD Player.Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation.If the DVD cannot be pulled out or the errorindication does not disappear after the disc isejected, see your Acura dealer.Do not try to force the disc out of the player.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.Run the engine to recharge the battery.



DVD Player Error Indications

209

▲ ▼

An audio CD can be played in eitherthe main CD player in the front panel,in the DVD/CD player below thefront panel, or in the optional CDchanger. This allows the front andrear passengers to listen to differentCDs.

Select the rear system by turning theRR CTRL knob clockwise. If the CDis loaded in the main CD player, orCD changer, select CD/CHG. If theCD is loaded in the lower player,select DVD/AUX.

If the CD is loaded in the main CDplayer or CD changer, refer to pages

and for operatinginstructions. If the CD is loaded inthe DVD/AUX player, refer to page

.

If the CD is loaded in the main CDplayer or optional CD changer, selectit by pressing the CD/CHG button.If it is loaded in the lower player,press DVD/AUX.

Press the button to skip to thebeginning of the next track. Pressthe button to return to thebeginning of current track. Press itagain to go to the beginning of theprevious track.

If the CD changer is selected, usethe and buttons to changediscs.

If the CD is loaded in the main CDplayer or optional CD changer, selectit by pressing the CD/CHG button.If it is loaded in the lower player,press DVD/AUX.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold either the FWD or REWbuttons. When you press FWD, youwill see ‘‘CUE’’ in the display. Whenyou press REW, you will see ‘‘REW’’in the display. Release the buttonwhen the system reaches the desiredpoint.

Press the button to skip to thebeginning of the next track. Pressthe button to return to thebeginning of the current track. Pressit again to go to the beginning of theprevious track.

194 196

202



Playing a CD With the RearEntertainment System

Playing a CD With the Front Panel

Playing a CD With the Rear ControlPanel

Playing a CD With the RemoteControl

210

▲▼

Select the radio with the AM/FMbutton on the front panel, the rearcontrol panel, or the remote control.

From the front panel, after selectingthe rear system with the RR CTRLknob, use the TUNE, SEEK, orSCAN functions or the Presetbuttons to select a station.

From the rear control panel in theceiling, use the and

buttons to select the stationsthat are set into the Preset buttons.Pressing the or button willcause the system to search up ordown the band for a station with astrong signal. You will see SEEK inthe display.

To change Preset stations with theremote control, press the or

button. To search for strongstations, press the or

button.

After loading the cassette, select thecassette player with the TAPEbutton on the front panel, the rearcontrol panel, or the remote control.

On the rear control panel, use thePROG/PLAY button to reverse thetape’s direction. Use the and

buttons to skip. Press thebutton to skip forward to the

beginning of the next song orpassage. You will see FF flashing inthe display. Press the button toskip backward to the beginning ofthe current song or passage. You willsee REV flashing in the display.

On the remote control, use thePROG/PLAY button to reverse thetape’s direction. Press the FWD orREW button to fast forward orrewind the tape. Press either ofthose buttons or the PROG/PLAYbutton to return to playing the tape.To skip to the beginning of the nextsong or passage, press the

button. You will see FFflashing in the display. To skip to thebeginning of the current song orpassage, press the button. Youwill see REV flashing in the display.

To operate the cassette player fromthe front panel, refer to page .Make sure you have selected therear system with the RR CTRL knobfirst.

191

Playing the Radio With the RearEntertainment System

Playing a Cassette With the RearEntertainment System



▲




To replace the batteries in theremote control, press down on the

symbol on the back, then slide thecover off. Remove the old batteries.Make sure the polarity of newbatteries is correct when you installthem. Install the cover by sliding iton until it locks. The remote controluses two AA batteries.

When you are not using the remotecontrol, store it in its holder in thefront seat pocket as shown.



Replacing Remote ControlBatteries

Storing the Remote Control

212

BATTERIES

COVER

HOLDER

The audio for the rear entertainmentsystem is sent to the wirelessheadphones that come with thesystem. To turn on the headphones,press the red button on the earpiece.Adjust the volume level with the dialat the bottom of the same earpiece.

To adjust the comfort of theheadphones, slide the earpieces upor down the headband.

For greater battery life, turn off theheadphones when they are not in useby pressing the red button again.They will turn off automatically ifthey do not receive an audio signalfrom the system for several minutes.When not in use, store theheadphones in the pocket on theback of either front seat.

Some state and local govermentagencies prohibit the use ofheadphones by the driver of a motorvehicle. Always obey applicable lawsand regulations.

The batteries are under the domedcovers on the back of each earpiece.To open the battery compartment,pry on the bottom of the lid with acoin. Remove the battery and note itspolarity. Install the new battery inthe earpiece with the polarity thesame. Set the cover in place, thenslide it up until it locks. Eachheadphone uses two AAA batteries.

Wireless Headphones Replacing Batteries



COVER

ON/OFF BUTTONVOLUMEDIAL

There are three headphoneconnectors for the third seatpassengers. Each connector has itsown volume control.

The system will accept auxiliaryinputs from standard video gamesand video equipment.

Auxiliary input jacks and headphoneconnectors for the rearentertainment system are under thethird seat armrest on the passenger’sside. To access these connectors,open the cover by pulling up on thelever.

Auxiliary Input Jacks



AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS

LEVERARMREST

HEADPHONE CONNECTORS

VOLUME DIALS

The security system helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights and taillights flashes ifsomeone attempts to break into yourvehicle or remove the radio. Thisalarm continues for two minutes,then the system resets. To reset analarming system before the twominutes have elapsed, unlock thedriver’s front door with the key orthe remote transmitter.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

The security system will not set ifthe hood, tailgate, or any door is notfully closed. If the system will not set,check the Door and Tailgate OpenMonitor on the instrument panel(see page ) to see if the doors andtailgate are fully closed. Since it isnot part of the monitor display,manually check the hood.

The security system sets auto-matically fifteen seconds after youlock the doors, hood, and tailgate.For the system to activate, you mustlock the doors from the outside withthe key, lock tab, door lock switch,or remote transmitter. The securitysystem light next to the driver’s doorlock starts blinking immediately toshow you the system is setting itself.

Once the security system is set,opening any door or the tailgate(without using the key or the remotetransmitter), or the hood, will causeit to alarm. It also alarms if the radioand DVD components are removedfrom the dashboard or the wiring iscut.

70

Security System


SECURITY SYSTEM LIGHT

Push in the Cruise Control MasterSwitch to the left of the steeringcolumn. The indicator in theswitch will light.

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forconditions such as city driving,winding roads, slippery roads, heavyrain, or bad weather. You shouldhave full control of the vehicle underthose conditions.

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

Press and release the SET/DECEL button on the steeringwheel. The CRUISE CONTROLlight on the instrument panelcomes on to show the system isnow activated.

1.

2.

3.

Cruise Control Using the Cruise Control

Cruise Control


CRUISE CONTROL MASTER SWITCH

CANCEL

RESUME/ACCEL

SET/DECEL

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:You can increase the set cruising

speed in any of these ways:

When climbing a steep hill, theautomatic transmission maydownshift to hold the set speed.

The cruise control may not hold theset speed when you are going up anddown hills. If your speed increasesgoing down a hill, use the brakes toslow down to the desired speed. Thiswill cancel the cruise control. Toresume the set speed, press theRESUME/ACCEL button. TheCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel comes on.

Press and hold the RESUME/ACCEL button. The vehicle willaccelerate. When you reach thedesired cruising speed, release thebutton.

Push on the accelerator pedal.Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed and press the SET/DECELbutton.

To increase your speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RESUME/ACCEL button repeatedly. Eachtime you do this, your vehicle willspeed up about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Press and hold the SET/DECELbutton. The vehicle will decelerate.Release the button when youreach the desired speed.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the SET/DECELbutton repeatedly. Each time youdo this, your vehicle will slowdown about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Tap the brake pedal lightly withyour foot. The CRUISECONTROL light on the instru-ment panel will go out. When thevehicle slows to the desired speed,press the SET/DECEL button.The vehicle will then maintain thedesired speed.

CONTINUED

Changing the Set Speed

Cruise Control


You can cancel the cruise control inany of these ways:

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

Press the Cruise Control MasterSwitch.

Even with the cruise control turnedon, you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set cruising speed.

Resting your foot on the brake pedalwill cause the cruise control tocancel.

Tap the brake pedal.Pressing the Cruise Control MasterSwitch turns the system completelyoff and erases the previous cruisingspeed from memory. To use thesystem again, refer to

.

When you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake pedal, the CRUISECONTROL light on the instrumentpanel will go out and the vehicle willbegin to slow down. You can use theaccelerator pedal in the normal way.The system remembers thepreviously-set cruising speed. Toreturn to that speed, accelerate toabove 25 mph (40 km/h) and thenpress and release the RESUME/ACCEL button. The CRUISECONTROL light comes on. Thevehicle will accelerate to the samecruising speed as before.

Cancelling the Cruise Control

Using theCruise Control

Cruise Control


CANCELBUTTON

－

＋

CONTINUED

All models of MDX have a tripcomputer. The following pagesexplain the trip computer on themodel without the navigation system.To operate the trip computer on themodel with the navigation system,refer to the navigation manual.

The Trip Computer displays thefollowing information. The ignitionswitch must be in Accessory or ON.

Clock

Direction of travel

Trip Computer


(Without Navigation System)

219

INSTANTANEOUSFUEL MILEAGE

CLOCKBUTTON

TRIPBUTTON

RESETBUTTON

DISPLAY BRIGHTNESSCONTROL

/CALIBRATE BUTTON

/ZONE BUTTONRESET, SET BUTTON

COMPASS

OUTSIDETEMPERATURE

The temperature sensor is locatedin the front bumper. Therefore,the temperature reading can beaffected by heat reflection fromthe road surface, engine heat, andthe exhaust from the surroundingtraffic. Because of theseconditions, it may take a while forthe temperature to read correctly.

Instantaneous fuel mileage

The Range, or estimated distanceyou can travel on the fuelremaining in the tank. Thisdistance is estimated from the fueleconomy you have gotten over thelast several miles, so it will varywith changes in speed, traffic, etc.

Outside temperature

Trip Computer


ELAPSED TIME

RANGE

INSTANTANEOUS FUEL MILEAGE

CLOCK

COMPASS

AVERAGE FUELECONOMY

TRIP METER OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE

The outside temperature, fueleconomy, range, and trip odometercan be displayed in either English orMetric units. To change betweenunits, press the TRIP button andhold it for five seconds.

To reset the Avg fuel economy, E/T,and Trip odometer, press and holdthe RESET button until you hear abeep.

The display shows either the rangeand Avg fuel economy, or the E/Tand Trip odometer. To changebetween these, press and release theTRIP button.

The Avg display shows you theaverage fuel economy since youlast reset the display.

The E/T is the elapsed time thatthe ignition has been on. Itautomatically resets to 0.0 when itreaches twelve hours. This displaycan be reset at any time.

The Trip display shows you thetotal distance you have drivensince it was last reset. When itpasses 999.9, it stops displayingtenths and goes to 1000. When itpasses 9999, it clears to 0.0.

The display also has manualfunctions for the Climate ControlSystem. Refer to page .137

Trip Computer


Changing Units of MeasurementChanging and Resetting theDisplay

221

To set the clock:

Push the CLOCK button. Thehours digits will start blinking. Ifyou want to only set the minutes,go to step 4.

To change the hours to a lowernumber, press and hold theMODE button. To change thehours to a higher number, pressand hold the A/C button.

To set the minutes, press theCLOCK button again. Theminutes digits will start blinking.

When the hours reach the desirednumber, release the button.

Use the MODE or A/C button toset the minutes to the desirednumber.

Press the CLOCK button again.The clock will return to its normaldisplay.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Setting the Clock

Trip Computer


－－

You can also quickly set the time tothe nearest hour. Press the CLOCKbutton, then press the RESET button.If the displayed time is before thehalf hour, it will reset back to theprevious hour. If the displayed timeis after the half hour, it will resetforward to the next hour.

For example:1:06 will reset to 1:001:52 will reset to 2:00

The compass shows your directionof travel. It indicates eight directions.

Compass operation can be affectedby driving near power lines orstations, across bridges, throughtunnels, over railroad crossings, pastlarge vehicles, or driving near largeobjects that can cause a magneticdisturbance.

It can also be affected by accessoriessuch as antennas and roof racks thatare mounted by magnets.

The compass may need to bemanually calibrated after exposure toa strong magnetic field. If thecompass seems to be continuallyshowing the wrong direction and isnot self-calibrating, do the following.

NOTE: You should do this procedurein an open area, away from buildings,power lines, and other vehicles.

The compass is self-calibrating. Ifyou see ‘‘ ’’ in the directiondisplay and ‘‘Calibrate’’ is blinking,the compass is self-calibrating.

CONTINUED

Trip Computer

Compass Operation

Compass Calibration


－－

Press and hold the CLOCK andTRIP buttons until the displaychanges (about 1 second).

Press the Calibrate (MODE)button.

Press the Set (FAN) button.‘‘Calibrate’’ will start blinking, andthe direction display will change to‘‘ ’’.

1. 2.

Trip Computer


－－

Drive the vehicle slowly in twocomplete circles.

In most areas, there is a variationbetween magnetic north and truenorth. Zone selection is required sothe compass can compensate for thisvariation. To check and select thezone set into the compass, do thefollowing.

Press and hold the CLOCK andTRIP buttons until the displaychanges (about 1 second).

When the display goes from‘‘ ’’ to an actual heading, theunit is calibrated.

Press the CLOCK, TRIP, orRESET button to complete thecalibration and return the displayto normal.

1.

CONTINUED

Trip Computer


Compass Zone Selection

225

If the zone is incorrect, press andhold the MODE button to get thenumber to count down, or the A/Cbutton to get the number to countup. If the zone is correct, continueto step 5.

Press the Set (FAN) button to setthe zone selection.

Press the CLOCK, TRIP orRESET button to exit the zoneselection and return display tonormal.Press the Zone (A/C) button. The

zone the compass is currently setto is displayed.

Find the zone for your area on themap.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Trip Computer


Trip Computer


Always use a soft cloth and mildglass/plastic cleaner (such ascleaners for computer monitorscreens) to clean the display.

When you wipe the screen, someblack lines may appear because ofstatic electricity build-up. This isnormal. They will disappear in five toten minutes.

The Brightness control has sevenpositions. In the middle five positionsthe display will dim when you turnon the parking lights or headlights.

Moving the control to the far leftposition turns off the display. It willcome back on for several seconds ifyou press any of the buttons.

In the far right (maximumbrightness) position, the display willnot dim when you turn on theparking lights.

Trip Computer

Cleaning the DisplayBRIGHTNESS control


Always refer to the operatinginstructions and safety informationthat came with your garage dooropener or other equipment youintend to operate with the HomeLinkUniversal Transceiver. If you do nothave this information, you shouldcontact the manufacturer of theequipment.

While training or using HomeLink,make sure you have a clear view ofthe garage door or gate, and that noone will be injured by its movement.

The HomeLink transceiver storesthe code in a permanent memory.There should be no need to retrainHomeLink if your car’s battery goesdead or is disconnected.

If your garage door opener wasmanufactured before April 1982, youmay not be able to programHomeLink to operate it. Garage dooropeners manufactured before thatdate do not have a safety feature thatcauses them to stop and reverse if anobstacle is detected during closing,increasing the risk of injury. If youhave questions, call (800) 355-3515.

If you are training HomeLink tooperate a garage door or gate, it isrecommended that you unplug themotor for that device during training.Repeatedly pressing the remotecontrol button could burn out themotor.

If you have problems with trainingthe HomeLink Universal Transceiver,or would like information on homeproducts that can be operated by thetransmitter, call (800) 355-3515. Onthe Internet, go to www.homelink.com.

The HomeLink UniversalTransceiver built into your vehiclecan be programmed to operateremotely-controlled devices aroundyour home, such as garage doors,lighting, or home security systems. Itcan replace up to three remotetransmitters.


General Information

Customer Assistance

HomeLink Universal Transceiver


－

If you are training the second orthird buttons, go directly to Step 1.

Unplug the garage door openermotor from the house current.

Before you can use HomeLink tooperate devices around your home, itmust ‘‘learn’’ the proper codes. Forexample, to train HomeLink to openand close the garage door:

If you just tookdelivery of your vehicle and have nottrained any of the buttons inHomeLink before, you should eraseany previously learned codes beforetraining the first button. To do this,press and hold the two outsidebuttons on the HomeLinktransceiver for about 20 seconds,until the red light flashes. Releasethe buttons, then proceed to Step 1.

Hold the end of the garage dooropener remote control 2 to 5inches from HomeLink. Makesure you are not blocking yourview of the red light in HomeLink.

Select the HomeLink button youwant to train.

Press the button on the remotecontrol and the button onHomeLink at the same time. Holddown both buttons.

2.

3.

4.1.

Training HomeLink Before you begin



Canadian Owners:The remote control you are trainingfrom may stop transmitting after twoseconds. This is not long enough forHomeLink to learn the code. Releaseand press the button on the remotecontrol every two seconds untilHomeLink has learned the code.

For security purposes, newer garagedoor opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’or variable code. Information fromthe remote control and the garagedoor opener are needed beforeHomeLink can operate the garagedoor opener.

The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’procedure trains HomeLink to theproper garage door opener code.The following proceduresynchronizes HomeLink to thegarage door opener so they send andreceive the correct codes.

The red light in HomeLink shouldbegin flashing. It will flash slowlyat first, then rapidly.

When the red light flashes rapidly,release both buttons. HomeLinkshould have learned the code fromthe remote control.

Plug in the garage door openermotor, then test the HomeLinktransceiver button by pushing it. Itshould operate the garage door.

If the button does not work, repeatthis procedure to train it again. If itstill does not work, you may have a

variable or rolling code garagedoor opener. Test this by pressingand holding the HomeLinktransceiver button you just trained.If the red light blinks for twoseconds, then stays on, you have arolling code garage door opener.You may be able to verify this withthe manufacturer’s documentation.Go to ‘‘Training With a RollingCode System.’’

Repeat these steps to train theother two HomeLink buttons tooperate any other remotely-controlled devices around yourhome (lighting, automatic gate,security system, etc.).

5.

6.8.

7.

CONTINUED

Training With a Rolling CodeSystem



－

－

It may be helpful to have someoneassist you with this procedure.

Find the ‘‘Training’’ button on yourgarage door opener unit. Thelocation will vary, depending onthe manufacturer. Themanufacturer’s documentationmay help.

Press the Training button on thegarage door opener unit until thelight next to the button comes on,then release it. The light may blink,or come on and stay on. You thenhave approximately 30 seconds tocomplete the following steps.

Make sure you have properlycompleted the ‘‘TrainingHomeLink’’ procedure.

Press and hold the button onHomeLink for 3 4 seconds.(The same button you trained withthe ‘‘Training HomeLink’’procedure.)

Press the HomeLink button again.It should operate the garage door.

Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton again for 3 4 seconds.This should turn off the traininglight on the garage door openerunit. (Some systems may requireyou to press the button up to threetimes.)

6.

2.

4.

5.

1.

3.



TRAINING BUTTON




To train an already programmedtransmitter button to operate a newdevice:

To erase the codes stored in all threebuttons, press and hold the twooutside buttons until the red lightbegins to flash, then release thebuttons.

Select the HomeLink button youwant to train.

Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton until the red light begins toflash slowly (approximately 20seconds).

While continuing to hold theHomeLink button, place theremote control for the device 2 to5 inches from HomeLink.

Release both buttons. HomeLinkshould now be trained to operatethe device.

Press and hold the button on theremote control. Hold both buttonsuntil the red light begins to flashrapidly.

You should erase all three codesbefore selling the vehicle.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.Retraining a Button

Erasing Codes



Your Acura is equipped with a rearview camera in the tailgate near thetailgate opening handle.

Whenever you shift to R (Reverse)with the ignition switch in the ON(II) position, the rear view is shownin the navigation system display.

For the best picture, always keep therear view camera clean, and do notcover the camera lens.

Since the rear view camera displayarea is limited, you should alwaysback up slowly and carefully, andlook behind you for obstacles.

On U.S. Touring Model with NavigationSystem

Rear View Camera and Monitor


REAR VIEW CAMERA

Before you begin driving your Acura,you should know what gasoline touse, and how to check the levels ofimportant fluids. You also need toknow how to properly store luggageor packages. The information in thissection will help you. If you plan toadd any accessories to your vehicle,please read the information in thissection first.

.............................Break-in Period . 236.........................................Gasoline . 236

.........Service Station Procedures . 237................Filling the Fuel Tank . 237

....................Opening the Hood . 238...............................Oil Check . 240

.........Engine Coolant Check . 241...............................Fuel Economy . 242

.....................Vehicle Condition . 242...........................Driving Habits . 242

...Accessories and Modifications . 243.............................Carrying Cargo . 245

.................................Load Limit . 246

Before Driving

Before Driving 235

Help assure your vehicle’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

You should follow these same re-commendations with an overhauledor exchanged engine, or when thebrakes are replaced.

Do not change the oil until therecommended time or mileageinterval shown in the maintenanceschedule.

Avoid hard braking. New brakesneed to be broken-in by moderateuse for the first 200 miles (300km).

Your Acura is designed to operate onpremium unleaded gasoline with apump octane number of 91 or higher.

Use of a lower octane gasoline cancause occasional, metallic knockingnoises in the engine and will result indecreased engine performance.

We recommend gasolines containingdetergent additives that help preventfuel system and engine deposits.

Using gasoline containing lead willdamage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols. This contributes to airpollution.

We also recommend that you do nottow a trailer during the first 500miles (800 km).

Break-in Period, Gasoline

Before Driving

Break-in Period Gasoline

236

Because the fuel fill cap is on thedriver’s side of the vehicle, parkwith that side closest to theservice station pumps.

Open the fuel fill door by pullingon the handle to the left of thedriver’s seat.

In Canada, some gasolines containan octane-enhancing additive calledMMT. If you use such gasolines,your emissions control systemperformance may deteriorate andthe Malfunction Indicator Lamp onyour instrument panel may turn on.If this happens, contact yourauthorized Acura dealer for service.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Before Driving

Filling the Fuel Tank

Gasoline, Service Station Procedures

237

Pull

FUEL FILL CAP

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.Place the cap in the holder on thefuel fill door.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank, leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

Shift to Park or Neutral and setthe parking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

Screw the fuel fill cap back on,tighten it until it clicks severaltimes. If you do not properlytighten the cap, the MalfunctionIndicator Lamp may come on (seepage ).

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

Your vehicle has an on-boardrefueling vapor recovery system tohelp keep fuel vapors from goinginto the atmosphere. If the fuelnozzle keeps clicking off eventhough the tank is not full, theremay be a problem with this system.Consult your dealer.

1.

3.

4.

5.

6.

375

Service Station Procedures

Before Driving

Opening the Hood

238

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

CONTINUED

If you can open the hood withoutlifting the hood latch handle, or thehood latch handle moves stiffly ordoes not spring back as before, themechanism should be cleaned andlubricated (see page ).

Lift the hood up most of the way.The hydraulic supports will lift itup the rest of the way and hold itup.

To close the hood, lower it to about afoot (30 cm) above the fender, thenpress down firmly with your hands.After closing the hood, make sure itis securely latched.

Standing in front of the vehicle,put your fingers under the frontedge of the hood to the left ofcenter. Slide your hand to the leftuntil you feel the hood latchhandle. Push this handle up until itreleases the hood. Lift the hood.

3.

2.

323


Before Driving 239

LATCH

Wipe the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

Insert it all the way back in its tube.Check the engine oil level every timeyou fill the vehicle with fuel. Wait afew minutes after turning the engineoff before you check the oil.

Remove the dipstick (orangehandle).

3.2.

1.

Oil Check


Before Driving240

DIPSTICK

Remove the dipstick again andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

Refer toon page for information

on checking other items in yourAcura.

4.

307

305

311Adding

Engine Coolant

Adding Oil

Owner MaintenanceChecks

Engine Coolant Check

Before Driving


241

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

MAX

MIN

RESERVE TANK

The condition of your vehicle andyour driving habits are the two mostimportant things that affect the fuelmileage you get.

Always maintain your vehicle accord-ing to the maintenance schedule.This will keep it in top operatingcondition.

A cold engine uses more fuel than awarm engine. It is not necessary to‘‘warm-up’’ a cold engine by letting itidle for a long time. You can driveaway in about a minute, no matterhow cold it is outside. The enginewill warm up faster, and you getbetter fuel economy. To cut down onthe number of ‘‘cold starts,’’ try tocombine several short trips into one.

You can improve fuel economy bydriving moderately. Rapid acceler-ation, abrupt cornering, and hardbraking use more fuel.

Always drive in the highest gear thatallows the engine to run and acceler-ate smoothly.

Depending on traffic conditions, tryto maintain a constant speed. Everytime you slow down and speed up,your vehicle uses extra fuel. Use thecruise control, when appropriate, toincrease fuel economy.

The air conditioning puts an extraload on the engine which makes ituse more fuel. Turn off the A/C tocut down on air conditioning use.Use the flow-through ventilationwhen the outside air temperature ismoderate.

In winter, the build-up of snow onyour vehicle’s underside adds weightand rolling resistance. Frequentcleaning helps your fuel mileage andreduces the chance of corrosion.

An important part of that mainte-nance is the

(see page ). Forexample, an underinflated tirecauses more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’which uses fuel. It also wears outfaster, so check the tire pressure atleast monthly.

305

Vehicle Condition

Driving Habits

Owner MaintenanceChecks

Before Driving

Fuel Economy

242

However, if electronic accessoriesare improperly installed, or exceedyour vehicle’s electrical systemcapacity, they can interfere with the

operation of your vehicle, or evencause the airbags to deploy.

Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ).

If possible, have your dealer inspectthe final installation.

Before installing any accessory:

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle’scomputer-controlled systems, suchas the SRS and anti-lock brakesystem.

Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Acura accessories, canmake your vehicle unsafe. Beforeyou make any modifications or addany accessories, be sure to read thefollowing information.

Your dealer has genuine Acuraaccessories that allow you topersonalize your vehicle. Theseaccessories have been designed andapproved for your vehicle, and arecovered by warranty.

Non-Acura accessories are usuallydesigned for universal applications.Although aftermarket accessoriesmay fit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle’shandling and stability. (See‘‘Modifications’’ on the page foradditional information.)

Have the installer contact yourAcura dealer for assistance beforeinstalling any electronic accessory.

244

380

Accessories

Accessories and Modifications

Before Driving 243

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle’s handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

Any objectattached to or placed on the coversmarked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG,’’ in thecenter of the steering wheel andon top of the dashboard, couldinterfere with the proper operationof the airbags. Or, if the airbagsinflate, the objects could bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.

If a side airbaginflates, a cup holder or other hardobject attached on or near thedoor could be propelled inside thevehicle and hurt someone.

Covering the outside edge of afront seat-back, with a non-Acuraseat cover for example, couldprevent the airbag from inflatingproperly.

Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components with non-Acura (aftermarket) componentscould seriously affect your vehicle’shandling, stability, and reliability.

Some examples are:Lowering the vehicle with anaftermarket suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to impact speedbumps or other raised objects,which could cause the airbags todeploy.

Raising the vehicle with anaftermarket suspension kit canaffect the handling and stability.

Aftermarket wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents.

Do not modify your steering wheelor any other part of yourSupplemental Restraint System.Modifications could make thesystem ineffective.

Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult with your Acura dealer.

Modifications Additional Safety Precaution

Accessories and Modifications

Before Driving

Do not attach or place objects onthe airbag covers.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a front door.

Do not place any objects over theoutside edge of a front seat-back.

244

Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas so you can stow cargosafely.

The glove box, and the pockets inthe front doors and seat-backs, aredesigned for small, lightweight items.The cargo area is intended for larger,heavier items. The second and thirdrow seats can be folded flat to allowyou to carry more cargo or longeritems.

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle’s handling, stability,stopping distance, and tires, andmake it unsafe. Before carrying anytype of cargo, be sure to read thefollowing pages.

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving 245

GLOVE BOX DOOR POCKET

REAR COMPARTMENT

SEAT-BACK POCKET

CARGO AREA

×

－

Following are the steps fordetermining the correct cargo andluggage load limit.

The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity.

The maximum load limit for yourvehicle is 1,158 lbs (525 kg). Thisfigure includes the total weight of alloccupants, cargo, accessories, andthe tongue weight if you are towing atrailer.

Locate the statement, ‘‘thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed 1,158lbs (525 kg)’’ on your vehicle’splacard (on the driver’s doorjamb).

Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.(Seven is the seating capacity ofyour vehicle.)

Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from1,158 lbs (525 kg).

For example, if there will be five 150lbs (70 kg) occupants in your vehicle,the amount of available cargo andluggage load capacity is 408 lbs (175kg).5 150 lbs (70 kg) = 750 lbs (350kg)1,158 lbs (525 kg) 750 lbs (350 kg)= 408 lbs (175 kg)

If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer willbe transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.Determine the combined weight

of accessories, luggage, and cargobeing loaded in the vehicle. Theweight may not safely exceed theavailable cargo and luggage loadcapacity calculated in step 4 [408lbs (175 kg) in this example].

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Load Limit

Before Driving

Carrying Cargo

246

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

If you use an accessory roof rack,the roof rack weight limit may belower. Refer to the information thatcame with your roof rack.

If you carry any items on a roofrack, be sure the total weight ofthe rack and the items on it doesnot exceed 165 lb (75 kg).

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the cargo area, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible. Tiedown items that could be thrownabout the vehicle during a crash orsudden stop.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing thetailgate, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of carbon monoxidepoisoning, follow the instructionson page .

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe driver’s ability to operate thepedals, or with the properoperation of the seats.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If it is open, a passengercould injure their knees during acrash or sudden stop. 62

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving

Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Areaor on a Roof Rack

Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment

247

The separation net can be used tohold back soft, lightweight itemsstored in the cargo area. Heavyitems should be properly secured onthe floor of the cargo area. The netmay not prevent heavy items frombeing thrown forward in a crash or asudden stop.

The cargo cover can be used tocover the cargo area behind the thirdrow seats. When the third row seatsare folded down, the cargo cover canbe installed in a forward position andextended over the larger cargo area.Do not install the cargo cover in theforward position if the third rowseats are not folded down.

Optional Separation Net

Optional Cargo Cover

Before Driving

Carrying Cargo

248

........................Driving Guidelines . 250

........................Preparing to Drive . 251

.......................Starting the Engine . 252Starting in Cold Weather

....................at High Altitude . 252..............Automatic Transmission . 253

.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 253................Shift Lever Positions . 254..............Engine Speed Limiter . 257

....................Shift Lock Release . 257Variable Torque Management

..............................4WD System . 259

..............................VTM-4 Lock . 259...........................................Parking . 261

.....................The Braking System . 262.............Brake Wear Indicators . 262

...............Brake System Design . 263.......................Anti-lock Brakes . 263

Important Safety.........................Reminders . 264........................ABS Indicator . 264

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)........................................System . 266

...............Driving in Bad Weather . 269...........................Towing a Trailer . 271

Towing Your Vehicle Behind a................................Motorhome . 283

..............Off-Highway Guidelines . 285

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate theautomatic transmission. It alsoincludes important information onparking your vehicle, the brakingsystem, the VTM-4 System, the VSAsystem, and facts you need if you areplanning to tow a trailer.

Driving

Driving 249

Your MDX has higher groundclearance than a passenger vehicledesigned for use only on pavement.Higher ground clearance has manyadvantages for off-highway driving.It allows you to travel over bumps,obstacles, and rough terrain. It alsoprovides good visibility so you cananticipate problems earlier.

These advantages come at some cost.Because your vehicle is taller andrides higher off the ground, it has ahigh center of gravity. This meansthat your vehicle can tip or roll overif you make abrupt turns. Utilityvehicles have a significantly higherrollover rate than other types ofvehicles.

To prevent the risk of rollover orloss of control:

Take corners at slower speedsthan you would with a passengervehicle.

Avoid sharp turns and abruptmaneuvers whenever possible.

Do not modify your vehicle in anyway that would raise the center ofgravity.

Do not carry heavy cargo on theroof.

See page for additional guidelinesfor driving off-highway.

285

Driving

Driving Guidelines

250

You should do the following checksand adjustments every day beforeyou drive your vehicle.

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Check the adjustment of the seat(see page ).

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Check the adjustment of thesteering wheel (see page ).

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

Turn the ignition switch ON (II).Check the indicator lights in theinstrument panel.

Start the engine (see page ).

Check the gauges and indicatorlights in the instrument panel (seepage ).

Check that any items you may becarrying with you inside are storedproperly or fastened downsecurely.

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

Check that the hood and tailgateare fully closed. Make sure the doors and tailgate

are securely closed and locked.3.

2.

1.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

11.

12.

10.

15

115

89

252

67

101

Preparing to Drive

Driving 251

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. If the enginedoes not start right away, do nothold the key in START (III) formore than 15 seconds at a time.Pause for at least 10 secondsbefore trying again.

If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed half-waydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

If the engine still does not start,press the accelerator pedal all theway down and hold it there whilestarting in order to clear flooding.As before, keep the ignition key inthe START (III) position for nomore than 15 seconds. Return tostep 5 if the engine does not start.If it starts, lift your foot off theaccelerator pedal so the enginedoes not race.

An engine is harder to start in coldweather. The thinner air found athigh altitude above 8,000 feet(2,400 meters) adds to the problem.Use the following procedure:

Turn off all electrical accessoriesto reduce the drain on the battery.

Push the accelerator pedal half-way to the floor and hold it therewhile starting the engine. Do nothold the ignition key in START(III) for more than 15 seconds.When the engine starts, releasethe accelerator pedal gradually asthe engine speeds up and smoothsout.

If the engine fails to start in step 2,push the accelerator pedal to thefloor and hold it there while youtry to start the engine for no morethan 15 seconds. If the enginedoes not start, return to step 2.

1.

2.

3.

5.

6.1.

2.

3.

4.

Starting in Cold Weather at HighAltitude (Above 8,000 feet/2,400 meters)

Starting the Engine

Driving252

This indicator on the instrumentpanel shows which position the shiftlever is in.

Your Acura’s transmission has fiveforward speeds, and is electronicallycontrolled for smoother shifting. Italso has a ‘‘lock-up’’ torque converterfor better fuel economy. You mayfeel what seems like another shiftwhen the converter locks.

The ‘‘D ’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II). If it flasheswhile driving (in any shift position),it indicates a possible problem in thetransmission. Avoid rapidacceleration and have thetransmission checked by anauthorized Acura dealer as soon aspossible.

The malfunction indicator lamp maycome on along with the ‘‘D ’’indicator if there is a problem in theautomatic transmission controlsystem.

5

5

Shift Lever Position Indicator

Automatic Transmission

Driving 253

－To shift from:P to R

R to NN to DD to DD to DD to 22 to 11 to 2

2 to DD to DD to DD to NN to RR to P

Do this:Press the brake pedal, thenmove the shift lever.

Move the lever.

5 4 3

5

5 4

4 3

3

3

3 4

4 5

5

The shift lever has eight positions. Itmust be in Park or Neutral to startthe engine. When you are stopped inD , D , D , 2, 1, N or R, press firmlyon the brake pedal, and keep yourfoot off the accelerator pedal.

You cannot shift out of Park with thebrake pedal depressed when theignition switch is in LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I).

This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal.

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see Shift Lock Release on page

.

To avoid transmission damage, cometo a complete stop before shiftinginto Park. The shift lever must be inPark before you can remove the keyfrom the ignition switch.

257

Shift Lever Positions Park (P)


Driving254

SHIFT LEVER

－

－

－

－－

To shift to Reversefrom Park, see the explanation underPark. To shift to Reverse fromNeutral, come to a complete stop andthen shift.

Use Neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to Park posi-tion if you need to leave the vehiclefor any reason. Press on the brake pe-dal when you are moving the shiftlever from Neutral to another gear.

Use this position foryour normal driving. Thetransmission automatically selects asuitable gear for your speed andacceleration. You may notice thetransmission shifting up at higherspeeds when the engine is cold. Thishelps the engine warm up faster.

Your car has a reverse lockout soyou cannot accidentally shift toReverse from Neutral or any otherdriving position when the vehiclespeed exceeds 7 9 mph (12 14km/h).

If you cannot shift to Reverse whenthe car is stopped, press the brakepedal and slowly shift to Neutral, andthen to Reverse.

If there is a problem in the reverselockout system, or your vehicle’sbattery is disconnected or goes dead,you cannot shift to Reverse. (Referto Shift Lock Release on page ).257

Reverse (R)

Neutral (N)

Drive (D )5


Driving 255

－－These positionsare similar to D , except when youselect the D position, only the firstfour gears are selected. When youselect D , only the first three gearsare selected. D can also keep thetransmission from cycling betweenfourth and fifth gears in stop-and-godriving, and D can keep thetransmission from cycling betweenthird and fourth gears.

This position locksthe transmission in second gear. Itdoes not downshift to first gearwhen you come to a stop. Secondgives you more power when climbing,and increased engine braking whengoing down steep hills. Use secondgear when starting out on a slipperysurface or in deep snow. It will helpreduce wheelspin.

For faster acceleration when in D ,D or D , you can get thetransmission to automaticallydownshift by pushing the acceleratorpedal to the floor. The transmissionwill shift down one or two gears,depending on your speed.

Use D to provide engine brakingwhen going down a steep hill. Dgives you more power and increasedengine braking.

54

34

3

34 5

33

Drive (D , D ) Second (2)4 3


Driving256

－If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce theRPM below the red zone.

Set the Parking brake.

With the lever in thisposition, the transmission locks inFirst gear.

If you shift into First position whenthe vehicle speed is above 31 mph(50 km/h), the transmission shiftsinto Second gear first to avoidsudden engine braking.

This allows you to move the shiftlever out of Park if the normalmethod of pushing on the brakepedal does not work. This procedureis also used to release the ReverseLockout.

Make sure the key is in theignition switch LOCK (0) position.

To release the Reverse Lockout,make sure the key is in theACCESSORY (I) position.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Engine Speed Limiter Shift Lock ReleaseFirst (1)


Driving 257

Put a cloth on the edge of the ShiftLock Release slot cover next tothe shift lever. Use a small flat-tipped screwdriver or small metalplate (neither are included in thetool kit) to remove the cover.Carefully pry on the edge of thecover.

Insert a screwdriver in the ShiftLock Release slot.

Push down on the screwdriverwhile you press the release buttonand move the shift lever out ofPark to Neutral.

To release the Reverse Lockout,move the shift lever from Neutralto Reverse, then to Park.

Remove the screwdriver from theshift lock release slot, then installa new cover.Depress the brake pedal andrestart the engine.

If you need to use the Shift LockRelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have thevehicle checked by your Acuradealer.

3. 4.

5.

6.


Driving258

COVER SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT

The Variable Torque Management4WD System (VTM-4) automaticallytransfers varying amounts of enginetorque to the rear wheels.

If more traction is needed when yourMDX is stuck or is likely to becomestuck, you can use the VTM-4 Lockbutton to increase torque to the rearwheels when the shift lever is in the1, 2 or R position. As soon as thisfeature is no longer needed, pressthe VTM-4 Lock button again todisengage the VTM-4 Lock.

Variable Torque Management 4WD System

Driving

VTM-4 Lock

259

Do not use the VTM-4 Lock button ondry, paved roads. Driving on dry,paved roads with VTM-4 Lock ON maydamage the rear dif f erential whenmaking a turn. Strange noises andvibration can also result.

To engage the VTM-4 Lock: To disengage the VTM-4 Lock, doone of the following:

Press the VTM-4 Lock button.Move the shift lever to D , D orD .Turn the ignition to OFF (0).

When you restart your MDX, theVTM-4 Lock feature will be off.

The VTM-4 Lock will temporarilydisengage when the vehicle speedexceeds 18 mph (30 km/h). It willautomatically engage again as thespeed slows below 18 mph (30km/h). The light in the VTM-4 Lockbutton will remain on the whole time.

The vehicle speed must be below18 mph (30 km/h).Move the shift lever to first (1),second (2) or reverse (R) gear. Toshift Reverse from Neutral, cometo a complete stop and then shift.Press the VTM-4 Lock button.The light in the button will comeon.

To get unstuck, apply light pressureto the accelerator pedal. Do not spinthe front tires for more than a fewseconds. Because of the amount oftorque applied to the rear tires, theyshould not spin. This is normal. Ifyou are not able to get the vehicle tomove, apply the brakes to stop thewheels, then reverse direction.

1.

2.

3.

3 45

Driving

Variable Torque Management 4WD System

260

Do not continuously spin the f ront tiresof your MDX. Continuously spinningthe f ront tires can cause transmissionor rear dif f erential damage.

－

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. The indicatoron the instrument panel shows thatthe parking brake is not fullyreleased; it does not indicate that theparking brake is firmly set. Makesure the parking brake is set firmlyor your vehicle may roll if it isparked on an incline.

Set the parking brake before you putthe transmission in Park. This keepsthe vehicle from moving and puttingpressure on the parking mechanismin the transmission making iteasier to move the shift lever out ofPark when you want to drive away.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from the curb.

If the vehicle is facing downhill, turnthe front wheels toward the curb.

Make sure the parking brake is fullyreleased before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat or damagethe rear brakes.

Make sure the moonroof and thewindows are closed.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The three way catalyticconverter gets very hot, and couldcause these materials to catch onfire.

Lock the doors with the key or theremote transmitter.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.,in the cargo area or take themwith you.

Turn off the lights.

Parking Tips

Parking

Driving 261

When the brake pads need replacing,you will hear a distinctive metallic‘‘screeching’’ sound when you applythe brakes. If you do not have thebrake pads replaced, they will beginscreeching all the time.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by downshifting to a lowergear and taking your foot off theaccelerator pedal.

Check your brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Since alonger distance is needed to stopwith wet brakes, be extra cautiousand alert in your driving.

Your Acura is equipped with discbrakes at all four wheels. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. The ABS helpsyou retain steering control whenbraking very hard.

Put your foot on the brake pedal onlywhen you intend to brake. Restingyour foot on the pedal keeps thebrakes applied lightly, causing themto build up heat. Heat build-up canreduce how well your brakes work. Italso keeps your brake lights on allthe time, confusing drivers behindyou.

All four brakes have audible brakewear indicators.

Your brakes may sometimes squealor squeak when you apply themlightly. Do not confuse this with thebrake wear indicators. Theindicators make a very audible‘‘screeching.’’

Brake Wear Indicators

The Braking System

Driving262

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal; it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes.

this defeats thepurpose of the ABS. Let the ABSwork for you by always keeping firm,steady pressure on the brake pedalas you steer away from the hazard.This is sometimes referred to as

Activation varies with the amount oftraction your tires have. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before youactivate the ABS. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

Your vehicle has an Anti-lock BrakeSystem (ABS) as standardequipment. ABS helps to prevent thewheels from locking up and skiddingduring hard braking, allowing you toretain steering control.

When the front tires skid, you losesteering control; the vehiclecontinues straight ahead eventhough you turn the steering wheel.The ABS helps to prevent lock-upand helps you retain steering controlby pumping the brakes rapidly; muchfaster than a person can do it.

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

The ABS also balances the front-torear braking distribution accordingto vehicle loading.

‘‘stomp and steer.’’

CONTINUED

You should never pump thebrake pedal;

Anti-lock BrakesBrake System Design

Driving

The Braking System

263

Front

＊

＊

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock. Slow down and allow a greaterdistance between vehicles underthose conditions.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safe,prudent speed for the road andweather conditions.

it only helps with steeringcontrol during braking. You shouldalways maintain a safe followingdistance from other vehicles.

The ABS is self-checking. If anythinggoes wrong, the ABS indicator onthe instrument panel comes on (seepage ). This means the anti-lockfunction of the braking system hasshut down. The brakes still work likea conventional system without anti-lock, providing normal stoppingability. You should have the dealerinspect your vehicle as soon aspossible.

69

ABS IndicatorImportant Safety Reminders A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

ABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop thevehicle;

The Braking System

Driving264

ABS INDICATOR

U.S. indicator shown

If the ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator come on together,and the parking brake is fullyreleased, the front-to-rear brakingdistribution system may also shutdown.

Test your brakes as instructed onpage . If the brakes feel normal,drive slowly and have your vehiclerepaired by your dealer as soon aspossible. Avoid sudden hard brakingwhich could cause the rear wheels tolock up and possibly lead to a loss ofcontrol.

377

The Braking System

Driving 265

The VSA system cannot enhance thevehicle’s driving stability in allsituations and does not control yourvehicle’s entire braking system. It isstill your responsibility to drive andcorner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

When VSA activates, you will see theVSA Activation indicator blink.

The Vehicle Stability Assist systemhelps to stabilize the vehicle duringcornering if the vehicle turns moreor less than desired. It also assistsyou in maintaining traction whileaccelerating on loose or slipperyroad surfaces. It does this byregulating the engine’s output, andby selectively applying braking.

When VSA activates, you may noticethat the engine does not respond tothe accelerator in the same way itdoes at other times. You will also seethe VSA Activation Indicator blink.

Driving

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

VSA Activation Indicator

266

VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR

The VSA system indicator (see page) comes on and stays on when

there is a problem with the VSAsystem. The VSA Activationindicator will also come on.

If the VSA indicator comes on whiledriving, pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe and turn off theengine. Reset the system byrestarting the engine, and watch theVSA system indicator. If theindicator remains on, or comes backon while driving, have the VSAsystem inspected by your Acuradealer.

If the indicator does not come onwhen the ignition switch is turnedON (II), there may be a problemwith the VSA system. Have yourdealer inspect your vehicle as soonas possible.

Without VSA, your vehicle will havenormal braking and cornering ability,but it will not have VSA traction andstability enhancement.

This switch is under the left vent.Press it to turn the Vehicle StabilityAssist system on and off.

When VSA is off, the VSA ActivationIndicator light comes on as areminder. Pressing the switch againturns the system back on.

73

CONTINUED


Driving

VSA System Indicator VSA Off Switch

267

VSA SYSTEM INDICATOR

VSA is turned on every time youstart the engine, even if you turned itoff the last time you drove thevehicle.

Driving with varying tire or wheelsizes may cause the VSA tomalfunction. When replacing tires,make sure they are of the same sizeand type as your original tires (seepage ).

Deactivate the VSA system if youneed to drive with the compact sparetire installed (see page ).

If you install winter tires, make surethey are the same size as those thatwere originally supplied with yourcar. Exercise the same cautionduring winter driving as you would ifyour vehicle was not equipped withVSA.

337

360


Driving

VSA and Tire Sizes

268

－－Always driveslower than you would in dryweather. It takes your vehicle longerto react, even in conditions that mayseem just barely damp. Applysmooth, even pressure to all thecontrols. Abrupt steering wheelmovements or sudden, hard appli-cation of the brakes can cause loss ofcontrol in wet weather. Be extracautious for the first few miles(kilometers) of driving while youadjust to the change in drivingconditions. This is especially true insnow. A person can forget somesnow-driving techniques during thesummer months. Practice is neededto relearn those skills.

Exercise extra caution when drivingin rain after a long dry spell. Aftermonths of dry weather, the firstrains bring oil to the surface of theroadway, making it slippery.

Rain, fog, and snow conditions re-quire a different driving techniquebecause of reduced traction andvisibility. Keep your vehicle well-maintained and exercise greatercaution when you need to drive inbad weather. The cruise controlshould not be used in these condi-tions.

Being able to seeclearly in all directions and beingvisible to other drivers are importantin all weather conditions. This ismore difficult in bad weather. To beseen more clearly during daylighthours, turn on your headlights.

Inspect your windshield wipers andwashers frequently. Keep the wind-shield washer reservoir full of theproper fluid. Have the windshieldwiper blades replaced if they start tostreak the windshield or leave partsunwiped. Use the defrosters and airconditioning to keep the windowsfrom fogging up on the inside (seepage ).140

CONTINUED

Driving Technique Visibility

Driving in Bad Weather

Driving 269

－ Check your tiresfrequently for wear and properpressure. Both are important inpreventing ‘‘hydroplaning’’ (loss oftraction on a wet surface). In thewinter, mount snow tires on all fourwheels for the best handling.

Watch road conditions carefully,they can change from moment tomoment. Wet leaves can be as slip-pery as ice. ‘‘Clear’’ roads can havepatches of ice. Driving conditionscan be very hazardous when theoutside temperature is near freezing.The road surface can becomecovered with areas of water puddlesmixed with areas of ice, so yourtraction can change without warning.

Be careful when downshifting. Iftraction is low, you can lock up thedrive wheels for a moment and causea skid.

Be very cautious when passing, orbeing passed by other vehicles. Thespray from large vehicles reducesyour visibility, and the wind buffetingcan cause you to lose control.

Traction

Driving in Bad Weather

Driving270

Your MDX has been designed to towa trailer, as well as for carryingpassengers and their cargo.

To safely tow a trailer, you shouldobserve the load limits, use theproper equipment, and follow theguidelines in this section.

Be sure to read thesection on page if you

plan to tow off paved surfaces.

Themaximum weight you can towdepends on several factors. Seepage for limits for your towingsituation. Towing a load that is tooheavy can seriously affect yourvehicle’s handling andperformance.

The weight thatthe tongue of a fully loaded trailerputs on the hitch should be 5 to 10percent of total trailer weight forboat trailers, and 8 to 15 percent oftotal trailer weight for all othertrailers. See page for limits foryour towing situation.

285

273

273

Off-HighwayGuidelines

CONTINUED

Load Limits

Total Trailer Weight: Tongue Load:

Towing a Trailer

Driving 271

Exceeding any load limit orimproperly loading your vehicleand trailer can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriously hurtor killed.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.

Too much tongue load reduces front-tire traction and steering control.Too little tongue load can make thetrailer unstable and cause it to sway.

The GCWR must be reduced 2percent for every 1,000 feet (305meters) of elevation.

The maximum allowable weight ofthe fully loaded vehicle and trailer is9700 lbs (4410 kg) with the properhitch and fluid coolers (See page

for information about fluidcoolers.)The maximum allowable weight of

the vehicle, all occupants, all cargoand the tongue load is 5730 lbs (2600kg).

The maximum allowable weights onthe vehicle axles are 2890 lbs (1310kg) on the front axle, and 2945 lbs(1335 kg) on the rear axle.

277Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR):

Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR):

Gross Combined Weight Rating(GCWR):

Towing a Trailer

Driving272

＊

＊

＊

Number ofOccupants

234567 Towing is Not Recommended

Number ofOccupants

234567 Towing is Not Recommended

Equipped with transmission cooler and power steering fluid cooler.Max. Tongue LoadMax. Trailer Weight

Max. Tongue LoadMax. Trailer WightEquipped with transmission cooler and power steering fluid cooler.

Towing a Trailer

Driving 273

Total Trailer Weight and Tongue Load Limits: BOAT TRAILERS

Total Trailer Weight and Tongue Load Limits: OTHER TYPES OF TRAILERS

The corresponding weight limits assume occupants fill seats from the front of the vehicle to the back, each occupant weighs 150 lbs (70 kg) and each has 15 lbs (7

kg) of luggage in the cargo area.

450 lbs (205 kg)410 lbs (185 kg)310 lbs (140 kg)215 lbs (100 kg)

90 lbs (40 kg)

4500 lbs (2045 kg)4500 lbs (2045 kg)4500 lbs (2045 kg)4000 lbs (1820 kg)1700 lbs (770 kg)

450 lbs (205 kg)410 lbs (185 kg)310 lbs (140 kg)215 lbs (100 kg)

90 lbs (40 kg)

3500 lbs (1590 kg)3500 lbs (1590 kg)3000 lbs (1365 kg)2000 lbs (910 kg)1000 lbs (455 kg)

The best way to confirm that allloads are within limits is to checkthem at a public scale.

To help ensure a safe drive to a scale,or if you cannot get to a public scaleto check the weights of your rig, werecommended that you estimateyour total trailer weight and tongueload as described below.

To estimate your total trailer weight,add the weight of the trailer (asquoted by the trailer manufacturer)together with everything in or on thetrailer. Then refer to the tables onpage to confirm that you do notexceed the limit for your conditions.

To estimate tongue load:Park the vehicle on level ground.Measure from the ground to thebottom of the trailer hitch. Writethis number down.Connect the fully loaded trailer tothe hitch.Measure again from the ground tothe same spot on the bottom of thehitch.Subtract the result from Step 4from the result in Step 2 and referto the chart (Fig. 1).

If the difference is:1½ = 150 lbs (68 kg)2¼ = 250 lbs (114 kg)

3 = 350 lbs (159 kg)3¾ = 450 lbs (204 kg)

4 = over 450 lbs (204 kg)If the difference is more than 4 ,you have too much tongue loadat the rear. Move or removecargo from the trailer and thevehicle, and measure again.

If the estimated total trailer weightand tongue load do not exceed thelimits for your towing situation (seepage ), carefully drive yourtrailer to a public scale. Be sure yourvehicle and trailer are fully loaded,with all occupants and cargo youplan to take on the road.

1.2.

3.

4.

5.

273 273

Estimating Loads

Total Trailer Weight

Tongue Load Fig. 1

Towing a Trailer

Driving274

’’’’’’’’’’

’’

The best way to confirm that yourvehicle and trailer loads are withinlimits is to have them checked at apublic scale. The vehicle and trailershould be fully loaded, and alloccupants should stay in the vehicle.

Check the front gross axle weight.Limit: 2890 lbs (1310 kg)

Check the gross vehicle weight.Limit: 5730 lbs (2600 kg)

If you cannot weigh the rear axledirectly, calculate the rear grossaxle weight. Subtract the weight inStep 1 from the weight in Step 2.Limit: 2945 lbs (1335 kg)

1. 2.

3.

CONTINUED

Checking Loads

Towing a Trailer

Driving 275

Check the gross combined weight. Check the weight of the hitchedtrailer. Write this number down.

Check the weight of the unhitchedtrailer. Limit: See page .

Calculate the tongue load.Subtract the weight in Step 5 fromthe weight in step 6.Limit: See page .Range: 5-10% for boat trailers

8-15% for other trailers

Gross combined weight should bedecreased 2% for every 1000 feet(305 meters) of elevation.

4. 5. 6.

7.

Limit: 273

273

Towing a Trailer

Driving276

9700 lbs (4410 kg)

Discuss any additional needs withyour trailer sales or rental agency,and make sure all equipment isproperly installed and maintained.Since local requirements may vary,check with appropriate stateauthorities to be sure that yourequipment will meet all regulationsin the areas where you plan to tow.

Towing generally requires a varietyof supplemental equipment. Toensure the best quality, werecommend that you purchase Acuraequipment whenever possible. Yourdealer offers a trailer package thatincludes a hitch, a ball mount, awiring harness, a transmission fluidcooler and a heavy-duty powersteering fluid cooler.

We strongly recommend that youhave your Acura dealer install agenuine Acura hitch and therequired fluid coolers. Using non-Acura equipment may result inserious damage to your vehicle.

A weight distributing hitch is notrecommended for use with yourMDX as an improperly adjustedweight distributing hitch may reducehandling stability and brakingperformance.

Always use safety chains when youtow a trailer. Make sure the chainsare secured to the trailer and hitch,and that they cross under the tongueso they can catch the trailer if itbecomes unhitched. Leave enoughslack to allow the trailer to turncorners easily, but to do not let thechains drag on the ground.

This device is recommended if yourtrailer tends to sway. Your trailermaker can tell you what kind of swaycontrol you need and how to install it.

To help prevent overheating, aheavy-duty transmission fluid coolerand a heavy-duty power steeringfluid cooler are required for trailertowing. These coolers are availableonly from your Acura dealer.

CONTINUED

Towing Equipment andAccessories

Hitch

Weight Distributing Hitch

Safety Chains

Sway Control

Transmission Fluid Cooler andPower Steering Fluid Cooler

Towing a Trailer

Driving 277

There are two common types oftrailer brakes: surge and electric.Surge brakes are common for boattrailers, since the brakes will get wet.

Electric brakes must beelectronically actuated. Do notattempt to tap into your vehicle’shydraulic system. Any attempt toattach trailer brakes to your vehicle’shydraulic system will lower brakingeffectiveness and create a potentialhazard.

Acura requires that any trailer with atotal trailer weight of 1000 lbs (455kg) or more have its own brakes.

See your brake manufacturer formore information on installingelectric brakes.

Trailer Brakes

Towing a Trailer

Driving278

If you use a non-Acura trailerlighting harness and converter, youcan get the mating connector andpins that mate with the connector inyour vehicle from your Acura dealer.

Since lighting and wiring vary intrailer type and brand, you shouldalso have a qualified mechanic installa suitable connector between thevehicle and the trailer.

All states and Canadian provincesrequire some type of trailer lights.Check requirements for the areaswhere you plan to tow.

To get to your vehicle’s trailerlighting connector, open the tailgate,remove the cargo cover, thenremove the rear panel trim. Theconnector is on the left side. Werecommend that you have yourAcura dealer install an Acura wiringharness and converter. This harnesshas been designed and tested foryour vehicle.

CONTINUED

Trailer Lights

Towing a Trailer

Driving 279

GROUND(BLACK)

RIGHT TURN SIGNAL(GREEN/YELLOW)

BACK-UP LIGHT(GREEN/BLACK)

BRAKE LIGHT(WHITE/BLACK)

LEFT TURN SIGNAL(GREEN/BLUE)

TAILLIGHT(RED/BLACK)

Many states and provinces requirespecial exterior mirrors when towinga trailer. Even if they don’t, youshould install special mirrors if youcannot clearly see behind you, or ifthe trailer creates a blind spot.

When towing a trailer, werecommend that you carry a full-sizespare wheel and tire for your vehicle.Using the compact spare that camewith the MDX may adversely affectvehicle handling.

We also recommend that you carry afull-size spare wheel and tire for yourtrailer. Ask your trailer sales orrental agency where and how tostore the spare.

See page for proper tire size,page for how to store a full-sizedwheel and tire, and page forinformation on changing a flat tire.Remember to unhitch the trailerbefore changing a flat.

When preparing to tow, and beforedriving away, be sure to check thefollowing:

The vehicle has been properlyserviced, and the brakes,suspension, and cooling systemare in good operating condition. Ifyou tow frequently, follow theSevere Conditions maintenanceschedule.

The lights and brakes on yourvehicle and the trailer are workingproperly.

Your vehicle tires and spare are ingood condition and properlyinflated (see page ).

The trailer tires and spare are ingood condition and inflated asrecommended by the trailermaker.

All items on and in the trailer areproperly secured and cannot shiftwhile you drive.

The hitch, safety chains, and anyother attachments are secure.

All weights and loads are withinlimits (see pages and ).

The trailer has been properlyserviced and is in good condition.

337366

361 271 273

333

Trailer Mirrors

Spare Tires

Pre-Tow Checklist

Towing a Trailer

Driving280

The added weight, length, andheight of a trailer will affect yourvehicle’s handling and performance,so driving with a trailer requiressome special driving skills andtechniques.

For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmaneuvers before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelinesdiscussed below.

Avoid towing a trailer during yourvehicle’s first 500 miles (800kilometers) (see page ).

Drive slower than normal in alldriving situations. Obey all localspeed limits for vehicles with trailers.To keep the transmission fromfrequently upshifting anddownshifting, drive in D . Whendriving with a fix-sided (e.g, camper,utility) trailer, do not exceed 55 mph(88 km/h). At higher speeds, thetrailer may sway or affect vehiclehandling.

Make turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer tracks asmaller arc than your vehicle, and itcan hit or run over something thevehicle misses. Allow more time anddistance for braking. When you needto slow down, slowly lift your foot offthe throttle and gradually apply thebrakes. Do not brake or turnsuddenly as this could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over.

236

4

Driving Safely With a Trailer

Break-In Period

Towing Speed

Making Turns and Braking

Towing a Trailer

Driving 281

When climbing hills, closely watchyour temperature gauge. If it nearsthe red (Hot) mark, turn the airconditioning off, reduce speed and, ifnecessary, pull to the side of theroad to let the engine cool.

If the transmission shifts frequentlywhile going up a hill, shift down onegear.

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the vehicle inplace by pressing on the accelerator,as this can cause the automatictransmission to overheat.

When driving down hills, reduceyour speed and shift down to D . Donot ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, and rememberit will take longer to slow down andstop when towing a trailer.

Crosswinds and air turbulencecaused by passing trucks can disruptyour steering and cause your trailerto sway. When being passed by atruck or other large vehicle, keep aconstant speed and steer straightahead. Do not try to make quicksteering or braking corrections.

Always drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backing up.Grip the of the steeringwheel; then turn the wheel to the leftto get the trailer to move to the left,and turn the wheel right to move thetrailer to the right.

Follow all normal precautions whenparking, including putting thetransmission in PARK and firmlysetting the parking brake when youhave finished parking.

Do not park on an incline unless it isunavoidable. If you must park on anincline, turn the vehicle wheelstoward the curb on a downhill andaway from the curb on an uphill.After parking, place wheel chocks ateach trailer tire, on the downhill side.

If the vehicle wheels slip whenretrieving a boat from the water,shift to first gear and turn on VTM-4Lock (see page ).

Disengage VTM-4 Lock as soon asthe boat is out of the water toprevent damage to the VTM-4system.

2593

bottom

Driving on Hills Handling Crosswinds andTurbulence

Backing Up

Parking

Retrieving a Boat

Towing a Trailer

Driving282

Your MDX can be towed behind amotorhome at legal highway speedsup to 65 mph (100 km/h). Do notexceed 65 mph (100 km/h).Otherwise, severe transmissiondamage will occur. To avoid damageto the 4WD system, it must be towedwith all four wheels on the ground(flat towing).

When purchasing a tow bar, makesure you select a reputablemanufacturer and installer. Followthe manufacturer’s attachmentinstructions carefully.

If you tow more than 8 hours in oneday, you should repeat the aboveprocedure at least every 8 hours.(when you stop for fuel, etc.)

Do the following to prepare yourMDX for ‘‘flat towing.’’ Perform thisprocedure every day immediatelybefore you begin towing, and followthis procedure exactly; otherwise,severe automatic transmissiondamage will occur.

Check the transmission fluid level(see page ).

Maintaining the correct fluid levelis very important.

Start the engine.

Leave the ignition switch inACCESSORY (I) so the steeringwheel does not lock. Make surethe radio and any items pluggedinto the accessory power socketsare turned off so you do not rundown the battery.

Release the parking brake.

Shift to D , then to N. Let theengine run for three minutes, thenturn off the engine.

Press on the brake pedal. Shift thelever through all the positions (P,R, N, D , D , D , 2, 1)

317

Do not overfill.

5

5 4 3

CONTINUED

Extended Towing

Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome

Driving 283

Replace the transmission fluid everytwo years or 30,000 miles (48,000km), whichever comes first.

Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome

Driving284

The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in Accessory (I), andmake sure the steering wheel turnsf reely bef ore you begin towing.

Improper towing preparation willdamage the transmission. Follow theabove procedure exactly. If you cannotshif t the transmission or start theengine, your vehicle must betransported on a f lat-bed or trailer.

Your MDX has been designedprimarily for use on pavement. Butits higher ground clearance and newfour-wheel drive VTM-4 systemallow you to occasionally travel onunpaved roads, to campgrounds,picnic sites, and similar locations. Itis not designed for trailblazing,mountain climbing, or otherchallenging off-road activities.

If you decide to drive on unpavedroads, you will find that it requiressomewhat different driving skills.Your MDX will also handlesomewhat differently than it does onpavement. So be sure to read thisowner’s manual, pay special attentionto the precautions and tips in thissection, and get acquainted withyour vehicle before you leave thepavement.

General Information

Off-Highway Guidelines

Driving 285

The route presents limits (someroads are too steep and bumpy forexample). You have limits (in drivingskills and comfort). And your vehiclealso has limits (traction, stability, andpower, for instance).

Driving off-highway can behazardous if you fail to recognizelimits and take proper precautions.For example, you can have anaccident or rollover duringmaneuvers such as turning, drivingon hills, or over large obstacles.

Utility vehicles have a significantlyhigher rollover rate than other typesof vehicles. To avoid loss of controlor rollover, be sure to follow allrecommendations and precautionson page and in this section.

Seat belts are just as important off-road as on paved roads. Whereveryou drive, make sure you and yourpassengers always wear seat belts. Ifchildren or infants are along for theride, see that they are properlysecured. In a rollover crash, anunbelted person is more likely to diethan a person wearing a seat belt.

On many unpaved roads, you won’tfind lane markers, traffic signals, orsigns to warn you of possible troubleahead. It’s up to you to continuallyassess the situation and drive withinlimits.

Remember that your MDX hashigher ground clearance and ahigher center of gravity thanpassenger vehicles designed for useonly on pavement. This means yourvehicle can more easily tip or rollover if you make abrupt turns ordrive on slopes.

Be sure to store cargo properly, anddo not exceed your MDX’s cargoload limits (see pages and ).

250

246 271



Driving286

Improperly operating thisvehicle on or off-pavement cancause an accident or rollover inwhich you and your passengerscould be seriously injured orkilled.

Follow all instructions andguidelines in the owner’smanual.Keep your speed low anddon’t drive faster thanconditions permit.

The following pages contain practicaltips on basic off-highway operation.

Driving off-highway can be hard on avehicle. Before you leave thepavement, be sure all scheduledmaintenance and service has beendone, and that you have inspectedyour vehicle. Pay special attention tothe condition of the tires, and use agauge to check the tire pressures.

Off-highway, the general rule is tokeep your speed low. Of course,you’ll need enough speed to keepmoving forward. But at higherspeeds, you have less time to assessconditions and make good decisions.There’s also a greater chance ofsliding if you brake or turn tooquickly on wet soil, gravel, or ice. Inany situation, never go faster thanconditions allow.

Generally, the best off-pavementbraking technique is to gentlydepress the brake pedal, thenincrease pressure as more braking isneeded. Avoid hard braking. Keep inmind that you will usually need moretime and distance to brake to a stopon unpaved surfaces.

After you return to the pavement,carefully inspect your vehicle tomake sure there is no damage thatcould make driving it unsafe. Checkthe tires for damage and for properpressure.

If you need to brake hard because ofan emergency, apply steady, evenpressure to the brake pedal. Do notpump the brakes; let the anti-lockbraking system pump them for you.If you pump the brakes, the anti-lockcannot work as efficiently, and yourstopping distance may be increased.

For better traction on all surfaces,accelerate slowly and gradually buildup speed. If you try to start too faston wet soil, mud, snow, or ice, youmight not have enough traction toget underway. You may even digyourself into a hole. Starting with theshift lever in second gear (2) willhelp get you to a smooth start onsnow and ice.To get better traction when drivingin deep sand, turn off the VSA. CONTINUED

Controlling Speed

Check Out Your Vehicle

Accelerating and Braking

Driving Tips


Driving 287

Test your brakes from time to timeto make sure they are operatingproperly. This will also give you afeel for how much traction you haveon a given surface.

Off-highway, the basic turningtechnique is to drive at low speedand gradually adjust the amount ofsteering to suit the surface.

You should have no problem makingsharp turns at low speed on levelground. But never make an abruptturn at higher speeds, on or offpavement. With a higher center ofgravity, your vehicle can more easilytip or roll over.

Before driving up or down a hill, stopand assess the situation. If you can’tclearly see all road conditions (goodtraction, no bumps, holes or otherobstacles, a safe way out, etc.) walkthe slope before you drive on it. Ifyou have any doubt about whetheryou can safely drive on the slope,

. Find another route.

If you are driving up a hill and findthat you cannot continue (because ofthe steepness, a large obstacle, etc.),

. Your vehiclecould roll over. Slowly back down thehill, following the same route youtook up the hill.

Bumps, holes, rocks, and otherobstacles can be hazardous. Debrisin the road can damage yoursuspension or other components.Even small rocks can cut your tires.

More important, because yourvehicle has a high center of gravity,driving over a large obstacle, orallowing a wheel to drop into a deephole, can cause your vehicle to tip orroll over.

Drive slow enough to observeobstacles ahead and maneuveraround them. If you can’t avoid aserious obstacle, turn around andlook for a better route.

don’t do it

do not try to turn around

Turning

Avoiding ObstaclesDriving on Slopes


Driving288

Before driving through water, stopand make sure that:

The water is never deep enough tocover your wheel hubs, axles orexhaust pipe. You could stall, andnot be able to restart the engine.The water could also damageimportant vehicle components.

The water is not flowing too fast.Deep rushing water can sweep youdownstream. Even very shallowrushing water can wash theground from under your tires andcause you to lose traction andpossibly roll over.

The banks are sloped so you candrive out.

The banks and surface under thewater provide good traction. Thewater may hide hazards such asrocks, holes, or mud.

If you decide it’s safe to drivethrough water, choose a suitablespeed and engage VTM-4 Lock (seepage ), then proceed withoutshifting or changing speed. Do notstop the vehicle or shut off theengine while trying to cross a stream.After driving through water, testyour brakes. If the brakes got wet,drive slowly while gently pumpingthe brakes until they operatenormally.If the water is deeper than the wheelhubs, some additional service to theengine, transmission and differentialmay be required. This service is notcovered by your warranties.

259

Crossing a Stream

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

Driving 289

Use a nylon strap to attach the MDXto the recovery vehicle, and carefullytake out the slack in the strap. Oncethe strap is tight, the recoveryvehicle should apply force.Remember that the recovery vehicleneeds good traction to avoidbecoming stuck, too.

You should never use a jack to trygetting unstuck. A jack only workson firm, level ground. Also, yourvehicle could easily slip off the jackand hurt you or someone else.

You may be able to safely tow a lightweight trailer (such as a motorcycletrailer or small tent trailer) off-road ifyou follow these guidelines:

Do not exceed a trailer weight of1,000 pounds (450 kg) (includingcargo) or a tongue weight of 100pounds (45 kg).(Tongue weightshould be about 10% of the trailerweight.)

If you are unable to free yourself,you will need to be pulled out byanother vehicle. Your MDX isequipped with front and rear towhooks designed for this purpose.

Do not spin the tires at high speeds.It will not help you get out and maycause damage to the transmission orthe VTM-4 system.

If you get stuck, engage the VTM-4Lock mode (see page ) and turnoff VSA.

Carefully try to go in the direction(forward or reverse) that you thinkwill give you the best chance ofgetting unstuck.

259

If You Get Stuck Towing a Trailer


Driving290

Try to stay on smooth, level dirtroads, and avoid driving in hillyterrain.

Allow extra room for starting,stopping, and turning.

Slow down if you encounter bumpsor other obstacles.


Driving 291

This section explains the importanceof keeping your vehicle wellmaintained and why you shouldfollow basic maintenance safetyprecautions.

This section also includesMaintenance Schedules for normaldriving and severe driving conditions,a Maintenance Record, and instruc-tions for simple maintenance tasksyou may want to take care ofyourself.

......................Maintenance Safety . 294.Important Safety Precautions . 295

.................Maintenance Schedule . 296...Required Maintenance Record . 303

.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 305..............................Fluid Locations . 306

......................................Engine Oil . 307..................................Adding Oil . 307

....................Recommended Oil . 307..............................Synthetic Oil . 308

....................................Additives . 308.....Changing the Oil and Filter . 309

.............................Cooling System . 311............Adding Engine Coolant . 311

.......Replacing Engine Coolant . 313....................Windshield Washers . 316

....Automatic Transmission Fluid . 317..........................Differential Fluid . 318

.............Transfer Assembly Fluid . 318....................................Brake Fluid . 319

............................Brake System . 319..............................Power Steering . 320

.....................Air Cleaner Element . 321....................................Hood Latch . 323....................................Spark Plugs . 323

..............................Replacement . 323

............................Specifications . 325...........................................Battery . 326

.................................Wiper Blades . 328..............Air Conditioning System . 330

..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 331.....................................Drive Belts . 331....................................Timing Belt . 332

...............................................Tires . 332......................................Inflation . 332

..................................Inspection . 334..............................Maintenance . 335.............................Tire Rotation . 335

...Replacing Tires and Wheels . 336......................Wheels and Tires . 337

..........................Winter Driving . 337.............................Snow Tires . 338............................Tire Chains . 338

.............................................Lights . 339.....................Headlight Aiming . 341

........................Replacing Bulbs . 341....................Storing Your Vehicle . 349

If you have the skills and tools to per-form more complex maintenancetasks on your Acura, you may wantto purchase the Service Manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your Acuradealer.

405

Maintenance

Maintenance 293

Regularly maintaining your vehicle isthe best way to protect yourinvestment. Proper maintenance isessential to your safety and thesafety of your passengers. It will alsoreward you with more economical,trouble-free driving, and help reduceair pollution.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

This section includes instructions forsimple maintenance tasks, such aschecking and adding oil. Any serviceitems not detailed in this sectionshould be performed by an Acuratechnician or other qualifiedmechanic.

Maintenance Safety

Maintenance294

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations andschedules in this owner’smanual.

Before you begin any maintenance,make sure your vehicle is parked onlevel ground and that the parkingbrake is set. Also, be sure the engineis off. This will help to eliminateseveral potential hazards:

Be surethere is adequate ventilationwhenever you operate the engine.

Let theengine and exhaust system coolbefore touching any parts.

Read the instructions before youbegin, and make sure you have thetools and skills required.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, be careful when workingaround gasoline or batteries. Use acommercially available degreaser orparts cleaner, not gasoline, to cleanparts. Keep cigarettes, sparks, andflames away from the battery and allfuel-related parts.

Donot run the engine unless in-structed to do so.

You should wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingnear the battery or when usingcompressed air.

Maintenance Safety

Maintenance


Carbon monoxide poisoningfrom engine exhaust.

Burns from hot parts.

Injury from moving parts.

295

The Maintenance Schedule specifieshow often you should have yourvehicle serviced and what thingsneed attention. It is essential thatyou have your vehicle serviced asscheduled to retain its high level ofsafety, dependability, and emissionscontrol performance.

Service your vehicle according to thetime and mileage periods on one ofthe Maintenance Schedules on thefollowing pages. Select the schedulefor ‘‘Severe Conditions’’ if most ofyour driving is done under one ormore of the conditions listed on thatpage. Otherwise, follow the schedulefor ‘‘Normal Conditions.’’The services and time or distance

intervals shown in the maintenanceschedule assume you will use yourvehicle as normal transportation forpassengers and their possessions.You should also follow theserecommendations:

Avoid exceeding your vehicle’sload limit. This puts excess stresson the engine, brakes, and manyother parts of your vehicle. Theload limit is shown on the tireinformation label on the driver’sdoorjamb.

Operate your vehicle onreasonable roads within the legalspeed limit.

Drive your vehicle regularly over adistance of several miles(kilometers).

Always use unleaded gasoline withthe proper octane rating (see page

).236

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance

Which Schedule to Follow:

296

＃

U.S. Vehicles:

Your authorized Acura dealer knowsyour vehicle best and can providecompetent, efficient service.However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Keep all thereceipts as proof of completion, andhave the person who does the workfill out the Maintenance Record.Check your warranty booklet formore information.

We recommend the use of genuineAcura parts and fluids whenever youhave maintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same high-quality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, Acurarecommends that all maintenanceservices be performed at therecommended time or mileageperiod to ensure long-term reliability.

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance

Maintenance, replacement orrepair of emissions controldevices and systems may be doneby any automotive repairestablishment or individual usingparts that are ‘‘certif ied’’ to EPAstandards.

297

－

＃＊

＃

＃

＊

＃

Follow the Normal ConditionsMaintenance Schedule if thesevere driving conditionsspecified in the SevereConditions MaintenanceSchedule do not apply.

NOTE: If you onlydrive under a

‘‘severe’’ condition, you shouldfollow the Normal ConditionsMaintenance Schedule.

Follow the MaintenanceSchedule for Severe Conditions.

OCCASIONALLY

Maintenance

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

298

Visually inspect the following items:

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .Necessary for proper break-in of the VTM-4 rear differential.

miles x 1,000km x 1,000months

Service at the indicated distance ortime whichever comes first.

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections

120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years

Replace every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 1 year

Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop

Rotate tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)

152412

Every 3 years (independent of mileage)

304824

609648

457236

7512060

9014472

10516884

12019296

Replace engine oilReplace engine oil filterCheck engine oil and coolantReplace air cleaner elementInspect valve clearanceReplace spark plugsReplace timing belt , and inspect water pumpInspect and adjust drive beltsReplace engine coolant

Replace transmission fluidReplace VTM-4 rear differential fluidReplace transfer assembly fluidInspect front and rear brakesReplace brake fluidCheck parking brake adjustmentReplace dust and pollen filterRotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition at leastonce per month)

:1:

Adjust only if noisy

297

1

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Norm

alC

onditi

ons

□□□□□□□□□□

□□□□□□

□□□

□□

□

□□□□□

□□

＃

＃

＊

＃＃

＊

Maintenance 299

Canadian owners:

A, B, C, D

A

B

C

D

Follow the schedule for Severe Conditions.

Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in as required for each distance/time interval. Follow thisschedule if the severe driving conditions described in the Severe Conditions Schedule on the next page do not apply.

Replace engine oil.Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 335 ).Replace engine oil filter.Inspect front and rear brakes.Check parking brake adjustment.Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox and boots.Inspect suspension components.Inspect driveshaft boots.Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and checkfor leaks.Inspect exhaust system .Inspect fuel lines and connections .Replace air cleaner element.Inspect and adjust drive belts.Replace dust and pollen filter.Replace rear differential fluid.

7,500 mi/12,000 km15,000 mi/24,000 km/1 yr22,500 mi/36,000 km30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs37,500 mi/60,000 km3 yrs45,000 mi/72,000 km/3 yrs

52,500 mi/84,000 km60,000 mi/96,000 km/4 yrs67,500 mi/108,000 km75,000 mi/120,000 km/5 yrs

82,500 mi/132,000 km6 yrs90,000 mi/144,000 km/6 yrs97,500 mi/156,000 km105,000 mi/168,000 km/7 yrs

112,500 mi/180,000 km120,000 mi/192,000 km/8 yrs9 yrs120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrsthen every 60,000 mi/96,000 km/5 yrs

Do items in A.Do items in A, B, D .Do items in A.Do items in A, B, C, D.Do items in A.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).Replace transmission fluid.Replace transfer assembly fluid. Do items in A,

B.Do items in A.Do items in A, B, C, D.Do items in A.

Replace transmission fluid.Replace transfer assembly fluid. Do items in A,

B.Do items in A.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).Do items in A, B, C, D.Do items in A.

Replace timing belt , and inspect water pump.Replace transmission fluid.Replace transfer assembly fluid.Inspect valve clearance.Replace spark plugs. Do items in A, B.

Do items in A.Do items in A, B, C, D.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).Replace engine coolant.

••

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, lastcolumn, page .Necessary for proper break-in of the VTM-4 rear differential.

Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.

NOTE:

:

1:297

1

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Norm

alC

onditio

ns

(listed

by

dista

nce

/time)

－

－

＊

＊

＊

＃＃

＃

＃＊

＊

＊

Driving less than 5 miles (8 km)per trip or, in freezingtemperatures, driving less than10 miles (16 km) per trip.Driving in extremely hot [over90°F (32°C)] conditions.Extensive idling or long periodsof stop-and-go driving.Trailer towing, driving with aroof top carrier, or driving inmountainous conditions.Driving on muddy, dusty, or de-iced roads.

Follow the Severe ConditionsMaintenance Schedule if you driveyour vehicle MAINLY under one ormore of the following conditions:

Follow the MaintenanceSchedule for Severe Conditions.

Maintenance

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

300

Visually inspect the following items:

Follow this schedule for rear differentialfluid replacement if you use your vehiclefor off-highway driving, trailer towing,or mainly in stop-and go driving.Otherwise, use the fluid replacementschedule in the Maintenance Schedulefor Normal Conditions.

miles x 1,000km x 1,000months

Service at the indicated distance ortime whichever comes first.

Replace every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 monthsCheck oil and coolant at each fuel stop

Every 3 years (independent of mileage)

Rotate tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)

Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 monthsTie rod ends, steering gear box, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and conditions of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connectionsLights and controlsVehicle underbody

120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years

152412

304824

457236

609648

7512060

9014472

10516884

12019296

Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months

Replace engine oil and oil filterCheck engine oil and coolantReplace air cleaner element

Use normal schedule except in dustyconditions

Inspect valve clearanceReplace spark plugsReplace timing belt and inspect water pumpInspect and adjust drive beltsReplace engine coolant

Replace transmission fluidReplace VTM-4 rear differential fluidReplace transfer assembly fluidInspect front and rear brakesReplace brake fluidCheck parking brake adjustmentReplace dust and pollen filterLubricate all hinges, locks and latchesRotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition at leastonce per month)

Adjust only if noisy

Refer to page 332 for replacementinformation under special drivingconditions.Refer to page 331 for replacementinformation under special drivingconditions.

See page 297.

1 :

2 :

3 :

:

, 1

3

2

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditi

ons

－－

□□□□□□□

□□□

□□

□□□□□□□□

□

＊

＃

＃

＊

CONTINUEDMaintenance 301

Canadian Owners

U.S. Owners

A, B, C, D

B

C

A

D

Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.

3,750 mi/6,000 km7,500 mi/12,000 km/6 mos11,250 mi/18,000 km15,000 mi/24,000 km/1 yr18,750 mi/30,000 km22,500 mi/36,000 km26,250 mi/42,000 km30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs33,750 mi/54,000 km37,500 mi/60,000 km41,250 mi/66,000 km3 yrs45,000 mi/72,000 km/3 yrs48,750 mi/78,000 km52,500 mi/84,000 km56,250 mi/90,000 km60,000 mi/96,000 km/4 yrs63,750 mi/102,000 km67,500 mi/108,000 km71,250 mi/114,000 km

Refer to page to determine which schedule to use.Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in as required for each distance/time interval.

Replace engine oil and filter.Inspect front and rear brakes.Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 335 ).Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox and boots.Inspect suspension components.Inspect driveshaft boots.Replace air cleaner element every 15,000 mi(24,000 km) under dusty conditions. Otherwise, useNormal Conditions schedule.Replace rear differential fluid .Check parking brake adjustment.Lubricate all hinges, locks, and latches withmultipurpose grease.Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and checkfor leaks.Inspect exhaust system .Inspect fuel lines and connections .Check all lights.Inspect the underbody.Inspect and adjust drive belts.Replace transmission fluid.Replace transfer assembly fluid.Replace dust and pollen filter .

Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.Do items in A, B, C, D.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.Do items in A, B, C, D.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.

300

3

2

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditio

ns

(listed

by

dista

nce

/time)

□

□

□ □

□□

＊＃

＃

＊＊

＊

Maintenance302

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, lastcolumn, page .See timing belt on page to determine need for replacement.See dust and pollen filter on page for replacementinformation under special driving conditions.Follow this schedule for rear differential fluid replacement if youuse your vehicle for off-highway driving, trailer towing, ormainly in stop-and go driving. Otherwise, use the fluidreplacement schedule in the Maintenance Schedule for NormalConditions.

Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.

NOTE:

297332

331

:

1:2:

3:

75,000 mi/120,000 km/5 yrs78,750 mi/126,000 km82,500 mi/132,000 km86,250 mi/138,000 km6 yrs90,000 mi/144,000 km/6 yrs93,750 mi/150,000 km97,500 mi/156,000 km101,250 mi/162,000 km105,000 mi/168,000 km/7 yrs

108,750 mi/174,000 km112,500 mi/180,000 km116,250 mi/186,000 km120,000 mi/192,000 km/8 yrs9 yrs120,000 mi/ 192,000 km/10 yrsthen every 60,000 mi/96,000 km/5 yrs

Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).Do items in A, B, C, D.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.

Replace timing belt , and inspect waterpump.

Inspect valve clearance. Replace spark plugs.Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.Do items in A, B, C, D.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).Replace engine coolant.

••

1,

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditi

ons

(lis

ted

by

dis

tance

/tim

e)

CONTINUEDMaintenance

Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)

303

33,750 mi

37,500 mi

41,250 mi

45,000 mi

48,750 mi

52,500 mi

56,250 mi

60,000 mi

3,750 mi

7,500 mi

11,250 mi

15,000 mi

18,750 mi

22,500 mi

26,250 mi

30,000 mi

You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (page ) or severeconditions (page ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your vehicle.

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

Signature or dealer stamp Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

54,000 km

60,000 km

66,000 km

72,000 km(or 3 years)

78,000 km

84,000 km

90,000 km


6,000 km

12,000 km

18,000 km

24,000 km(or 1 year)

30,000 km

36,000 km

42,000 km


298300

Maintenance

Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)

304

63,750 mi

67,500 mi

71,250 mi

75,000 mi

78,750 mi

82,500 mi

86,250 mi

90,000 mi

93,750 mi

97,500 mi

101,250 mi

105,000 mi

108,750 mi

112,500 mi

116,250 mi

120,000 mi

Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

102,000 km

108,000 km

114,000 km


126,000 km

132,000 km

138,000 km


150,000 km

156,000 km

162,000 km


174,000 km

180,000 km

186,000 km


－

－

－

－

－

－

You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the page given.

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page

.

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,turn signals, brake lights, andlicense plate lights monthly. Seepage .

240

241

317

319

332

339

Owner Maintenance Checks

Maintenance 305

Fluid Locations

Maintenance306

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange loop)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

COOLANTRESERVOIR

POWER STEERINGFLUID (Red cap) RADIATOR CAP ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

BRAKE FLUID(Gray cap)

To add oil, unscrew and remove theengine oil fill cap on top of the valvecover. Pour in the oil, and install theengine oil fill cap. Tighten it securely.Wait a few minutes and recheck theoil level. Do not fill above the uppermark; you could damage the engine.

Make sure the API Certification Sealsays ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’Oil is a major contributor to your

engine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade 5W-20detergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements.

Pour the oil slowly and carefully soyou do not spill. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Honda Motor Oil is the preferred5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda Motor Oil in your vehicle foroptimum engine protection.

CONTINUED

Recommended OilAdding Oil

Engine Oil

Maintenance 307

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API Certification Seal,and it is the proper weight as shownon the chart. When using syntheticoil, you must follow the oil and filterchange intervals given in themaintenance schedule.

Your Acura does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect your engine’s or transmission’sperformance and durability.

5W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your Acura, toimprove cold weather starting, andto help your engine use less fuel.

The oil’s viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label.Select the oil for your vehicleaccording to this chart.

Engine Oil

Maintenance

Synthetic Oil

Additives

308

Ambient Temperature

Open the hood and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the time and distance(miles/kilometers) recommenda-tions in the maintenance schedule.The oil and filter collect contami-nants that can damage your engine ifthey are not removed regularly.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Engine Oil

Maintenance

Changing the Oil and Filter

309

WASHER DRAIN BOLT

Install a new oil filter according toinstructions that come with it.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten it to:

Remove the oil filter and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from your Acuradealer) is required to remove thefilter.

Refill the engine with the recom-mended oil.

Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

Turn off the engine, let it sit forseveral minutes, then check the oillevel. If necessary, add oil to bringthe level to the upper mark on thedipstick.

Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Replace the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator light should go out withinfive seconds. If it does not, turn offthe engine and check your work.

9.

8.

7.

6.

4.

5.

3.

Engine Oil

Maintenance310

OIL FILTER

29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.The coolant you add should alwaysbe a mixture of 50 percent antifreezeand 50 percent water. Never addstraight antifreeze or plain water.

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

Always use Honda All SeasonAntifreeze/Coolant Type 2. Thiscoolant is pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent water. Itdoes not require any additionalmixing.

If it is not available, you may useanother major-brand non-silicatecoolant as a temporary replacement.Make sure it is a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.However, continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result incorrosion, causing the coolingsystem to malfunction or fail. Havethe cooling system flushed andrefilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.

CONTINUED

Adding Engine Coolant

Cooling System

Maintenance 311

RESERVE TANK

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

Make sure the engine and radiatorare cool.

Turn the radiator cap counter-clockwise, without pressing downon it, until it stops. This relievesany pressure remaining in thecooling system.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Pour the coolant slowly andcarefully so you do not spill. Cleanup any spills immediately. Spilledcoolant could damage componentsin the engine compartment.

Put the radiator cap back on.Tighten it fully.

3.

4.

5.

6.

1.

2.

Cooling System

Maintenance312

RESERVE TANK

CONTINUED

Turn the ignition ON (II). Set theClimate control system to 90°F(32°C). Turn the ignition off.Open the hood. Make sure theengine and radiator are cool to thetouch.

Remove the radiator cap.

Loosen the drain plug on thebottom of the radiator. Thecoolant will drain through thesplash guard.

The cooling system should becompletely drained and refilled withnew coolant according to the timeand distance recommendations inthe maintenance schedule. Only useHonda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. Use of any non-Honda coolant or plain water canresult in corrosion and deposits inthe cooling system.

Draining the coolant requires accessto the underside of the vehicle.Unless you have the tools andknowledge, you should have thismaintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

1. 3.

2.

Replacing Engine Coolant

Cooling System

Maintenance 313

DRAIN PLUG

When the coolant stops draining,tighten the drain plug at thebottom of the radiator.

Tighten the drain bolt at the rearof the engine cylinder blocksecurely.Tightening torque:

Remove the reserve tank from itsholder by pulling it straight up.Drain the coolant, then put thetank back in its holder.

Install a rubber hose on the drainbolt in the back of the engineblock. Loosen the drain bolt.

6.

4. 5.

7.

Cooling System

Maintenance314

DRAIN BOLT RESERVE TANK RESERVETANK CAP

HOLDER

7 lbf·ft (10 N·m , 1.0 kgf·m)

Fill the reserve tank to the MAXmark. Install the reserve tank cap.

Install the radiator cap, andtighten it to the first stop.

Start the engine and let it run untilthe radiator cooling fan comes onat least twice. Then stop theengine.

Remove the radiator cap. Fill theradiator with coolant up to thebase of the filler neck.

Install the radiator cap, andtighten it fully.

Pour Honda All SeasonAntifreeze/Coolant Type 2 intothe radiator up to the base of thefiller neck. This coolant is amixture of 50 percent antifreezeand 50 percent water. Pre-mixingis not required.The cooling system capacity is:

10.

11.

12.

13.

9.

8.

Cooling System

Maintenance 315

FILLER NECK

Fill up to here

1.88 US gal (7.1 )

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition the blade edges.

The low washer level indicator willlight when the level is low (see page

).

Check the level in the windshieldwasher reservoir at least monthlyduring normal use. In bad weather,when you use the washers often,check the level every time you stopfor fuel.

71

Windshield Washers

Maintenance316

Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir.

Antif reeze can damage your vehicle’spaint, while a vinegar/water solutioncan damage the windshield washerpump.

Use only commercially-availablewindshield washer f luid.

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Park the vehicle on level ground.Shut off the engine.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission.

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the tube tobring it to the upper mark. Alwaysuse Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid). If it is notavailable, you may use aDEXRON III automatictransmission fluid as a temporary

replacement. However, continueduse can affect shift quality. Havethe transmission flushed andrefilled with Honda ATF-Z1 assoon as it is convenient.

To thoroughly flush thetransmission, the technicianshould drain and refill it withHonda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid), then drivethe vehicle a short distance. Dothis three times. Then drain andrefill the transmission a final time.

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your Acura dealer.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the time and distance recommen-dations in the maintenance schedule.

Insert the dipstick all the way backin the transmission.

1.

2.

3.

5.

6.

4.

Maintenance

Automatic Transmission Fluid

317

DIPSTICK

DIPSTICK

LOWER MARKUPPER MARK

Put a new washer on the filler bolt,then reinstall the filler bolt. Tightenit securely. Tightening torque:

The differential should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the time and distancerecommendations in themaintenance schedule.

Check the fluid level with thedifferential at normal operatingtemperature and the vehicle sittingon level ground. Remove thedifferential fluid filler bolt andwasher, and carefully feel inside thebolt hole with your finger. The fluidlevel should be up to the edge of thebolt hole. If it is not, slowly addVTM-4 Differential Fluid until itstarts to run out of the hole.

Check the fluid in the transferassembly with the vehicle sitting onlevel ground. Remove the filler plugand check that the fluid level is up tothe edge of the filler plug hole.

Maintenance

Differential Fluid Transfer Assembly Fluid

Differential Fluid, Transfer Assembly Fluid

318

FILLER BOLT

CORRECT LEVEL

FILLER PLUG

DRAIN PLUG

33 lbf·ft (45 N·m , 4.6 kgf·m)

－－ The fluid level should be between

the MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

Check the fluid level in the brakefluid reservoir monthly.

The brake fluid should be replacedaccording to the time recommenda-tion in the maintenance schedule.

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement. However, the use ofany non-Honda brake fluid can causecorrosion and decrease the life of thesystem. Have the brake systemflushed and refilled with HondaHeavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 assoon as possible.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle’sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.

If it is not, slowly add proper fluiduntil it starts to run out of the hole.Reinstall the filler plug and tighten itsecurely.

The transfer assembly fluid shouldbe drained and refilled with new fluidaccording to the time and distancerecommendations in themaintenance schedule.

Viscosity

Use a SAE 90 or SAE 80W-90viscosity hypoid gear oil, API serviceclassified GL4 or GL5 only, in thetransfer assembly.

Tightening torque:

Brake SystemBrake Fluid

Maintenance

Transfer Assembly Fluid, Brake Fluid

319

MAX

MIN

SAE 90: above 0°F ( 18°C)SAE 80W-90: below 0°F ( 18°C)

33 lbf·ft (45 N·m , 4.6 kgf·m)

Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. If it is not available, you mayuse another power steering fluid asan emergency replacement.However, continued use can causeincreased wear and poor steering incold weather. Have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

Check the level when the engine iscold. Look at the side of thereservoir. The fluid should bebetween the UPPER LEVEL andLOWER LEVEL. If it is below theLOWER LEVEL, add power steeringfluid to the UPPER LEVEL.

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.

Power Steering

Maintenance320

LOWER LEVEL

UPPER LEVEL

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef tor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.

The air cleaner element should bereplaced according to the time anddistance recommendations in themaintenance schedule.

The air cleaner element is inside theair cleaner housing on the driver’sside of the engine compartment.To replace it:

Loosen the four bolts with aPhillips-head screwdriver.

1.

CONTINUED

Replacement

Air Cleaner Element

Maintenance 321

BOLTS

Place the new air cleaner elementin the air cleaner housing.

Reinstall the air cleaner housingcover. Tighten the four bolts.

Remove the old air cleanerelement.

Carefully clean the inside of theair cleaner housing with a damprag.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Air Cleaner Element

Maintenance322

AIR CLEANER ELEMENT

Clean the hood latch assembly with amild cleaner, then lubricate it with amultipurpose grease. Lubricate allthe moving parts (as shown),including the pivot. Follow the timeand distance recommendations inthe Maintenance Schedule. If youare not sure how to clean and greasethe latch, contact your Acura dealer.

Clean off any dirt and oil that havecollected around the ignition coils.

The spark plugs in your vehicleshould be replaced according to thetime and distance recommendationsin the maintenance schedule.

Loosen the two holding clips byturning the heads one-quarter turncounterclockwise with a flat-tippedscrewdriver. Remove the cover bypulling it straight up.

Disconnect the cable from thecover on the front cylinder bankby pulling the cable out of theholder.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Hood Latch Spark Plugs

Hood Latch, Spark Plugs

Maintenance

Replacement

323

LATCH ASSEMBLY

HOLDING CLIP

Disconnect the wire connectorfrom the ignition coil by pushingon the lock tab and pulling on theconnector. Pull on the plasticconnector, not the wires.

Remove the spark plug witha five-eighths inch (16 mm) sparkplug socket.

Use a wrench to remove thehexagon socket head cap boltholding the ignition coil. Removethe ignition coil by pulling itstraight out.

Put the new spark plug into thesocket, then screw it into the hole.Screw it in by hand so you do notcrossthread it.

4. 5.

6.

7.

Maintenance

Spark Plugs

324

HEXAGON SOCKET HEAD CAP BOLT

Torque the spark plug. (If you donot have a torque wrench, tightenthe spark plug two-thirds of a turnafter it contacts the cylinder head.)Tightening torque:

Install the ignition coil. Reinstallthe hexagon socket head cap bolt.

Push the wire connector onto theignition coil. Make sure it locks inplace.

Repeat this procedure for theother five spark plugs.

Reinstall the cover on the frontcylinder bank while putting itsmounting clip in the hole on thepassenger’s side. Secure the coverby turning the heads of the twoholding clips one-quarter turnclockwise with a flat-tippedscrewdriver.

NGK:DENSO:

8.

9.

11.

12.

10.

Specifications:

Spark Plugs

Maintenance 325

13 lbf·ft (18 N·m , 1.8 kgf·m)

SKJ16DR-M11IZFR5K-11Tighten the spark plugs caref ully. A

spark plug that is too loose canoverheat and damage the engine.Overtightening can cause damage tothe threads in the cylinder head.

－

If the terminals are severely cor-roded, clean them with baking sodaand water. Then use a wrench toloosen and remove the cables fromthe terminals. Always disconnect thenegative ( ) cable first and recon-nect it last. Clean the battery termi-nals with a terminal cleaning tool orwire brush. Reconnect and tightenthe cables, then coat the terminalswith grease.

Check the battery terminals forcorrosion (a white or yellowishpowder). To remove it, cover theterminals with a solution of bakingsoda and water. It will bubble up andturn brown. When this stops, wash itoff with plain water. Dry off thebattery with a cloth or paper towel.Coat the terminals with grease tohelp prevent future corrosion.

Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

Check the condition of your vehicle’sbattery monthly.

Check the battery condition bylooking at the test indicator windowon the battery. The label on thebattery explains the test indicator’scolors.

WARNING:

Wash hands after handling.

Battery

Maintenance326

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damage to the vehicle’selectrical system.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, the audiosystem will disable itself. The nexttime you turn on the radio you willsee ‘‘ ’’ in the frequencydisplay. Use the Preset buttons toenter the five-digit code (see page

).182

Battery

Maintenance 327

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledmechanic do the batterymaintenance.

Charging the battery with the cablesconnected can seriously damage yourvehicle’s electronic controls. Detachthe battery cables bef ore connectingthe battery to a charger.

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every six months.Look for signs of cracking in therubber, or areas that are gettinghard. Replace the blades if you findthese signs, or if they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.

To replace a wiper blade:Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm by pushing inthe lock tab. Hold the lock tab inwhile you push the blade assemblytoward the base of the arm.

Raise the wiper arm off thewindow.Windshield: Raise the driver’s sidefirst, then the passenger’s side.

Front only:2.

1.

Wiper Blades

Maintenance328

WIPER ARMS

LOCK TAB

Slide the new wiper blade into theholder until the tabs lock.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metal rein-forcement along the back edge,remove the metal reinforcementstrips from the old wiper blade andinstall them in the slots along theedge of the new blade.

Remove the blade from its holderby grasping the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Front only:

Lower the wiper arm down againstthe window.Windshield: Lower the passenger’sside first, then the driver’s side.

6.

7.

4.

5.

3.

Wiper Blades

Maintenance 329

BLADE BLADE

REINFORCEMENT

Run the air conditioning at least oncea week during the cold weathermonths. Run it for at least tenminutes while you are driving at asteady speed with the engine atnormal operating temperature. Thiscirculates the lubricating oil con-tained in the refrigerant.

If the air conditioning does not get ascold as before, have your dealercheck the system. Recharge thesystem with Refrigerant HFC-134a(R-134a). (See Specifications on page

.)

Your vehicle’s air conditioning is asealed system. Any major mainte-nance, such as recharging, should bedone by a qualified mechanic. Youcan do a couple of things to makesure the air conditioning worksefficiently.

Periodically check the engine’sradiator and air conditioningcondenser for leaves, insects, anddirt stuck to the front surface. Theseblock the air flow and reduce coolingefficiency. Use a light spray from ahose or a soft brush to remove them.

390

Air Conditioning System

Maintenance330

AIR CONDITIONINGCONDENSER

Whenever you have the air conditioningsystem serviced, make sure the servicef acility uses a ref rigerant recyclingsystem. This system captures theref rigerant f or reuse. Releasingref rigerant into the atmosphere candamage the environment.

The condenser and radiator f ins bendeasily. Only use a low-pressure sprayor sof t-bristle brush to clean them.

This filter should be replaced every30,000 miles (48,000 km) under nor-mal conditions. It should be replacedevery 15,000 miles (24,000 km) if youdrive primarily in urban areas thathave high concentrations of soot inthe air from industry and diesel-pow-ered vehicles. Replace it more oftenif air flow from the climate controlsystem becomes less than usual.Have dust and pollen filter replacedby your Acura dealer.

The dust and pollen filter removespollen and dust that is brought infrom the outside through the heatingand cooling system/climate controlsystem.

Check the condition of the drive belt.Examine the edges of the belt forcracks or fraying.

An auto-tensioner adjusts the tensionof the drive belt. The pointer on theauto-tensioner should be in theproper range. It should be checkedaccording to the time and distancerecommendations in themaintenance schedule.

If the pointer is out of this range oryou see signs of wear, have the drivebelt replaced by your Acura dealer assoon as possible.

Maintenance

Dust and Pollen Filter Drive Belt

Dust and Pollen Filter, Drive Belt

331

Proper range

POINTER

－－

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort. Underinflated tires wearunevenly, adversely affect handlingand fuel economy, and are morelikely to fail from being overheated.Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride more harshly, are moreprone to damage from road hazards,and wear unevenly.

We recommend that you visuallycheck your tires every day. If youthink a tire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

To safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated. Thefollowing pages give more detailedinformation on how and when tocheck air pressure, how to inspectyour tires for damage and wear, andwhat to do when your tires need tobe replaced.

The timing belt should normally bereplaced at the intervals shown inthe maintenance schedule.

Replace the belt at 60,000 miles (U.S.)or 100,000 km (Canada) if you regu-larly drive your vehicle in one ormore of these conditions:

In very high temperatures(over 110°F, 43°C).In very low temperatures(under 20°F, 29°C).Frequently tow a trailer.

InflationTiresTiming Belt

Timing Belt, Tires

Maintenance332

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

The following chart shows therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal driving conditions andspeeds. Tire pressures for highspeed driving are the same as fornormal driving.

The compact spare tire pressure is:

If you check the pressure when thetires are hot [the vehicle has beendriven several miles (kilometers)],you will see readings 4 to 6 psi (30 to40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4 kgf/cm ) higherthan the cold reading. This is normal.Do not let air out to match thespecified cold pressure. The tire willbe underinflated.

You should get your own tirepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tire pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tire problemand not due to a variation betweengauges.

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure at least once a month. Eventires that are in good condition maylose one to two psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per month.Remember to check the spare tire atthe same time you check all theother tires.

Check the pressure in the tires whenthey are cold. This means the vehiclehas been parked for at least threehours. If you have to drive thevehicle before checking the tirepressure, the tires can still beconsidered ‘‘cold’’ if you drive lessthan 1 mile (1.6 km).

Add or release air, if needed, tomatch the recommended cold tirepressures on this page.

For convenience, the recommendedtire sizes and cold air pressures areon a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

For additional technical informationabout your tires, see page .392

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressurefor Normal Driving

CONTINUED

Recommended Tire Pressures forNormal Driving

Tires

Maintenance 333

P235/65R17 103T 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2kgf/cm )

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Your vehicle’s tires have wear indica-tors molded into the tread. When thetread wears down to that point, youwill see a 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wideband running across the tread. Thisshows there is less than 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire. Atire that is this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see thetread wear indicator in three or moreplaces around the tire.

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.You should look for:

Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.

These pressures are also given onthe tire information label on thedriver’s doorjamb.

Tubeless tires have some ability toself-seal if they are punctured.However, because leakage is oftenvery slow, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

Inspection

Tires

Maintenance334

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

TREAD WEAR INDICATORS

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, youshould have the tires rotated every7,500 miles (12,000 km). Move thetires to the positions shown in thechart each time they are rotated.

Make sure the installer balances thewheels when you have new tiresinstalled. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. Your vehicle’soriginal tires were dynamic or ‘‘spin’’balanced at the factory. For bestresults, have the installer perform adynamic balance.

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

The tires were properly balanced bythe factory. They may need to berebalanced at some time before theyare worn out. Have your dealercheck the tires if you feel a consis-tent vibration while driving. A tireshould always be rebalanced if it isremoved from the wheel for repair.

CONTINUED

Tire RotationMaintenance

Tires

Maintenance 335

Front

(For Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

Front

(For DirectionalTires and Wheels)

Improper wheel weights can damageyour vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Useonly Genuine Acura wheel weights f orbalancing.

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, then replace the twofront tires or the two rear tires as apair. Replacing just one tire canseriously affect your vehicle’s han-dling.

When shopping for replacementtires, you may find that some tiresare ‘‘directional.’’ This means theyare designed to rotate only in onedirection. If you use directional tires,they should be rotated only front-to-back.

The tires that came with yourvehicle were selected to match theperformance capabilities of thevehicle while providing the bestcombination of handling, ridecomfort, and long life. You shouldreplace them with radial tires of thesame size, load range, speed rating,and maximum cold tire pressurerating (as shown on the tire’ssidewall). Mixing radial and bias-plytires on your vehicle can reduce itsbraking ability, traction, and steeringaccuracy.

Replacing Tires and Wheels

Tires

Maintenance336

Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

＋Tires that are marked ‘‘M S’’ or‘‘All Season’’ on the sidewall have anall-weather tread design. Theyshould be suitable for most winterdriving conditions. Tires withoutthese markings are designed foroptimum traction in dry conditions.They may not provide adequateperformance in winter driving.For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

The ABS works by comparing thespeed of the wheels. When replacingtires, use the same size originallysupplied with the vehicle. Tire sizeand construction can affect wheelspeed and may cause the system towork inconsistently.

Wheel:

Tire:

See page for information aboutDOT Tire Quality Grading.If you ever need to replace a wheel,

make sure the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheelthat came on your vehicle. Re-placement wheels are available atyour Acura dealer.

392

CONTINUED

Winter DrivingWheels and Tires

Tires

Maintenance 337

17 x 6 1/2 JJ

P235/65R17 103T

If you mount snow tires on yourAcura, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas the original tires. Mount snowtires on all four wheels to balanceyour vehicle’s handling in all weatherconditions. Keep in mind the tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay not be as high as your vehicle’soriginal-equipment tires. You shoulddrive cautiously even when the roadsare clear. Check with the tire dealerfor maximum speed recommen-dations.

Because your Acura has limited tireclearance, mount only SAE Class ‘‘S’’cable-type traction devices, withrubber chain tensioners, on the fronttires. Use traction devices only whenrequired by driving conditions orlocal laws. Make sure they are thecorrect size for your tires.

When installing cables, follow themanufacturer’s instructions andmount them as tightly as you can.Drive slowly with them installed. Ifyou hear them coming in contactwith the body or chassis, stop andinvestigate. Make sure the cables areinstalled tightly, and that they arenot contacting the brake lines orsuspension. Remove them as soon as

you begin driving on cleared roads.

Metal link-type ‘‘chains’’ should notbe used. No matter how tight theyseem to be installed, they can comeinto contact with the body andsuspension, causing serious damage.

Snow Tires Tire Chains

Tires

Maintenance338

Traction devices that are the wrongsize or improperly installed candamage your vehicle’s brake lines,suspension, body, and wheels. Stopdriving if they are hitting any part ofthe vehicle.

Check the operation of your vehicle’sexterior lights at least once a month.A burned out bulb can create anunsafe condition by reducing yourvehicle’s visibility and the ability tosignal your intentions to otherdrivers.

Lights

Maintenance 339

LOW BEAM HEADLIGHT

HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHT

FOG LIGHTPARKING LIGHT/SIDE MARKER

TURN SIGNAL

Check the following:

Headlights (low and high beam)Parking lightsTaillightsBrake lightsHigh-mount brake lightTurn signalsBack-up lightsHazard light functionLicense plate lightSide marker lightsDaytime running lights(Canadian models)

If you find any bulbs are burned out,replace them as soon as possible.Refer to the chart on page todetermine what type of replacementbulb is needed.

391

Lights

Maintenance340

BRAKE/TAILLIGHTS HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT

LICENSE PLATE LIGHTSBACK-UP LIGHTTAIL LIGHTS/SIDE MARKER LIGHT

TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD LIGHT

Open the hood.

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thecargo area or pull a trailer,readjustment may be required.Adjustment of the headlights shouldbe performed by a Acura technicianor other qualified mechanic.

Remove the bulb by turning itapproximately one-quarter turncounterclockwise.

Your vehicle has halogen headlightbulbs, two on each side. Whenreplacing a bulb, handle it by its steelbase and protect the glass fromcontact with your skin or hardobjects. If you touch the glass, cleanit with denatured alcohol and a cleancloth.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by squeezing theconnector to unlock the tab, thenslide the connector off the bulb.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Replacing a Headlight BulbHeadlight Aiming

Lights

Maintenance 341

BULB CONNECTORHalogen headlight bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratchon the glass can cause the bulb tooverheat and shatter.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

To remove the front turn signalbulb, push it in slightly and turn itcounterclockwise. To remove theside marker bulb, pull it straightout of its socket.

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Install the new bulb into thesocket.

Push the electrical connector ontothe new bulb.

Insert the new bulb into the holeand turn it one-quarter turn clock-wise to lock it in place.

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

4.

5.

6.

Replacing Front Turn Signal/Parking and Side Marker LightBulbs

Lights

Maintenance342

TAB

Remove the bulb by turning itapproximately one-quarter turncounterclockwise.

Your car uses halogen fog lightbulbs. See page for informationon replacing a halogen bulb.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by squeezing theconnector to unlock the tab, thenslide the connector off the bulb.

Push the electrical connector ontothe new bulb.

Use a wrench to loosen the lightassembly’s mounting bolt.

Remove the light assembly fromthe bumper.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

341

CONTINUED

Replacing a Fog Light Bulb

Lights

Maintenance 343

BOLT

CONNECTOR

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

Insert the new bulb into the holeand turn it one-quarter turn clock-wise to lock it in place.

Put the light assembly into thebumper. Tighten the mountingbolt.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Open the tailgate. Use ascrewdriver protected with a clothto pry open the two covers.

Remove the two screws andremove the rear light assemblyfrom the rear pillar.

Determine which of the four bulbsis burned out: brake/taillight, turnsignal/hazard lights, side markerlight, or back-up light.

Remove the burned out bulb. Toremove the brake/taillight, back-up or side marker light bulb, pullthe bulb straight out of its socket.To remove the turn signal/hazardlight bulb, push it in and turn itcounterclockwise until it unlocks.

1.

2.

3.

4.

8.

6.

7.

5.

Replacing Rear Bulbs

Lights

Maintenance344

Put the socket back into the lightassembly and turn it clockwise tolock it in place.

Test the light to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket.Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

Install the new bulb into thesocket.

Push the socket into the lightassembly and turn it clockwiseuntil it locks.

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Install the rear light assembly inthe body.Tighten the two screws.Snap the covers back into position.

Remove the light assembly coverby prying carefully with a cloth-covered screwdriver in thenotches along the top edge.Thenpivot the cover out and down.

Remove the socket from the lightassembly by turning it one-quarterturn counterclockwise.

Place the cover back into the lightassembly. Push it up until it locksin place.

1.

4.

5.

6.

2.

3.6.

7.

8.

9.

Replacing a High-mount BrakeLight Bulb

Lights

Maintenance 345

The individual map lights, cargo arealight, tailgate light, and the vanitymirror lights come apart the sameway. They do not all use the samebulb.

Remove the lens by carefullyprying on the edge of the lens witha fingernail file or a small flat-tipscrewdriver. Do not pry on theedge of the housing around thelens.

Use a small phillips screwdriver toremove the lens from the licenseplate light assembly.

Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out. Push the new bulbinto the socket.

Reinstall the lens.

1.

2.

3.

1.

Replacing a Rear License PlateBulb

Replacing Bulbs in the InteriorLights

Lights

Maintenance346

FRONT INDIVIDUAL MAP LIGHT

Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out of its metal tabs.

Push the new bulb into the metaltabs. Snap the lens back in place.

Front individual map light:Pry on the front edge in front of bothmap lights.

Rear individual map light:Pry on the rear edge of the lens inthe middle.

Tailgate light:Pry on the upper edge to the left andright of center.

Cargo area light:Pry on the rear edge to the left andright of center.

3.2.

CONTINUED

Lights

Maintenance 347

REAR INDIVIDUAL MAP LIGHT CARGO AREA LIGHT

Lights

Maintenance348

SUN VISOR DOOR LIGHT

TAILGATE LIGHT

If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than onemonth), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors.

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (ifthe vehicle is being storedindoors).Fill the fuel tank.

Change the engine oil and filter(see page ).

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc. arecompletely dry.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in Park.

Support the front and rear wiperblade arms with a folded towel orrag so they do not touch thewindshield.

Disconnect the battery.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand tailgate seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand tailgate seals.

Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Nonporous materials, suchas plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

If possible, run the engine for awhile periodically (preferably oncea month).

If you store your vehicle for 12months or longer, have your Acuradealer perform the inspections calledfor in the 24 months/30,000 miles(48,000 km) maintenance schedule(Normal Conditions) as soon as youtake it out of storage (see page ).The replacements called for in themaintenance schedule are notneeded unless the vehicle hasactually reached that time or mileage.

309

298

Storing Your Vehicle

Maintenance 349

Regular cleaning and polishing ofyour Acura helps to keep it ‘‘new’’looking. This section gives youinformation on how to clean yourvehicle and preserve its appearance:the paint, brightwork, wheels andinterior. Also included are severalthings you can do to help preventcorrosion.

.................................Exterior Care . 352.....................................Washing . 352

.......................................Waxing . 353....................Aluminum Wheels . 353

..........................Paint Touch-up . 353..................................Interior Care . 354...................................Carpeting . 354.................................Floor Mats . 354

.........................................Fabric . 355...........................................Vinyl . 355

.......................................Leather . 355...................................Seat Belts . 355....................................Windows . 356

..........................Air Fresheners . 356....................Corrosion Protection . 357

.................................Body Repairs . 358

Appearance Care

Appearance Care 351

Frequent washing helps preserveyour vehicle’s beauty. Dirt and gritcan scratch the paint, while tree sapand bird droppings can permanentlyruin the finish.

Wash your vehicle in a shady area,not in direct sunlight. If the vehicle isparked in the sun, move it into theshade and let the exterior cool downbefore you start.

When you have washed and rinsedthe whole exterior, dry it with achamois or soft towel. Letting itair-dry will cause dulling and waterspots.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly withcool water to remove loose dirt.

Only use the solvents and cleanersrecommended in this Owner’sManual.

Fill a bucket with cool water. Mixin a mild detergent, such asdishwashing liquid or a productmade especially for car washing.

Wash the vehicle using the waterand detergent solution and a soft-bristle brush, sponge, or soft cloth.Start at the top and work your waydown. Rinse frequently.

Check the body for road tar, treesap, etc. Remove these stains withtar remover or turpentine. Rinse itoff immediately so it does notharm the finish. Remember to re-wax these areas, even if the rest ofthe vehicle does not need waxing.

As you dry the vehicle, inspect it forchips and scratches that could allowcorrosion to start. Repair them withtouch-up paint (see page ).353

Exterior Care

Appearance Care

Washing

352

Chemical solvents and strong cleanerscan damage the paint, metal, andplastic on your vehicle.

The radio antenna on your vehicle doesnot need to be removed when you use a‘‘drive-through’’ car wash. However, ifyou remove the antenna, make sure toreinstall it and tighten it securely usingan appropriate tool.

－

－

Your dealer has touch-up paint tomatch your vehicle’s color. The colorcode is printed on a sticker on thedriver’s doorjamb. Take this code toyour dealer so you are sure to getthe correct color.

Inspect your vehicle frequently forchips or scratches in the paint.Repair them right away to preventcorrosion of the metal underneath.Use the touch-up paint only on smallchips and scratches. More extensivepaint damage should be repaired bya professional.

Always wash and dry the wholevehicle before waxing it. You shouldwax your vehicle, including the metaltrim, whenever water sits on thesurface in large patches. It shouldform into beads or droplets afterwaxing.

Cleaning tar, insects, etc. withremovers also takes off the wax.Remember to re-wax those areas,even if the rest of the vehicle doesnot need waxing.You should use a quality liquid or

paste wax. Apply it according to theinstructions on the container. Ingeneral, there are two types ofproducts:

Waxes A wax coats the finish andprotects it from damage by exposureto sunlight, air pollution, etc. Youshould use a wax on your Acurawhen it is new.

Polishes Polishes and cleaner/waxes can restore the shine to paintthat has oxidized and lost some of itsshine. They normally contain mildabrasives and solvents that remove

the top layer of the finish. Youshould use a polish on your Acura ifthe finish does not have its originalshine after using a wax.

Clean your Acura’s aluminum alloywheels as you do the rest of theexterior. Wash them with the samesolution, and rinse them thoroughly.

The wheels have a protective clear-coat that keeps the aluminum fromcorroding and tarnishing. Usingharsh chemicals, including somecommercial wheel cleaners, or stiffbrushes can damage this clear-coat.Only use a mild detergent and softbrush or sponge to clean the wheels.

Exterior Care

Appearance Care

Paint Touch-upWaxing

Aluminum Wheels

353

Vacuum the carpeting frequently toremove dirt. Ground-in dirt will makethe carpet wear out faster.Periodically shampoo the carpet tokeep it looking new. Use one of thefoam-type carpet cleaners on themarket. Follow the instructions thatcome with the cleaner, applying itwith a sponge or soft brush. Keepthe carpeting as dry as possible bynot adding water to the foam.

The genuine Acura driver’s floor matthat came with your vehicle wasdesigned to be hooked over the floormat anchor. This keeps the floor matfrom sliding forward and possiblyinterfering with the pedals.

If you replace it, use a genuine Acurafloor mat that is designed to be usedwith the floor mat anchor in yourvehicle.

Do not put additional floor mats ontop of the anchored mat, otherwisethe additional mats may slideforward and interfere with the pedals.

If you use a non-Acura floor mat inthe driver’s footwell, make sure itfits properly and that it can be usedwith the floor mat anchor.

If you remove the driver’s floor mat,make sure to re-anchor it when youput it back in your vehicle.

Carpeting Floor Mats

Appearance Care

Interior Care

354

Remove dirt and dust with a vacuumcleaner. Wipe the vinyl with a softcloth dampened in a solution of mildsoap and water. Use the samesolution with a soft-bristle brush onmore difficult spots. You can also usecommercially-available spray orfoam-type vinyl cleaners.

If your seat belts get dirty, you canuse a soft brush with a mixture ofmild soap and warm water to cleanthem. Do not use bleach, dye, orcleaning solvents. They can weakenthe belt material. Let the belts air-dry before you use the vehicle.

Vacuum dirt and dust out of thematerial frequently. For generalcleaning, use a solution of mild soapand lukewarm water, letting it air dry.To clean off stubborn spots, use acommercially-available fabric cleaner.Test it on a hidden area of the fabricfirst, to make sure it does not bleachor stain the fabric. Follow theinstructions that come with thecleaner. Vacuum dirt and dust from the

leather frequently. Pay particularattention to the pleats and seams.Clean the leather with a soft clothdampened with clear water, thenbuff it with a clean, dry cloth. Iffurther cleaning is needed, use asoap specifically for leather, such assaddle soap. Apply this soap with adamp, soft cloth. Wipe down andbuff as described above.

CONTINUED

Vinyl Seat BeltsFabric

Leather

Interior Care

Appearance Care 355

LOOP

Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

Clean the windows, inside and out,with a commercially-available glasscleaner. You can also use a mixtureof one part white vinegar to ten partswater. This will remove the haze thatbuilds up on the inside of thewindows. Use a soft cloth or papertowels to clean all glass and clearplastic surfaces.

If you want to use an air freshener/deodorizer in the interior of yourvehicle, it is best to use a solid type.Some liquid air fresheners containchemicals that may cause parts ofthe interior trim and fabric to crackor discolor.

If you use a liquid air freshener,make sure you fasten it securely so itdoes not spill as you drive.

Windows Air Fresheners

Interior Care

Appearance Care356

The rear window def ogger wires arebonded to the inside of the glass.Wiping vigorously up-and-down candislodge and break the def ogger wires.When cleaning the rear window, usegentle pressure and wipe side-to-side.

Two factors normally contribute tocausing corrosion in your vehicle:

Moisture trapped in body cavities.Dirt and road salt that collects inhollows on the underside of thevehicle stays damp, promotingcorrosion in that area.

Removal of paint and protectivecoatings from the exterior andunderside of the vehicle.

Repair chips and scratches in thepaint as soon as you discover them.

Inspect and clean out the drainholes in the bottom of the doorsand body.

Check the floor coverings fordampness. Carpeting and floormats may remain damp for a longtime, especially in winter. Thisdampness can eventually causethe floor panels to corrode.

Use a high-pressure spray to cleanthe underside of your vehicle. Thisis especially important in areasthat use road salt in winter. It isalso a good idea in humid climatesand areas subject to salt air. Becareful of the ABS wheel sensorsand wiring at each wheel.

Have the corrosion-preventivecoatings on the underside of yourvehicle inspected and repairedperiodically.

Many corrosion-preventive measuresare built into your Acura. You canhelp keep your vehicle fromcorroding by performing somesimple periodic maintenance:

1.

2.

Corrosion Protection

Appearance Care 357

Body repairs can affect your vehicle’sresistance to corrosion. If yourvehicle needs repairs after a collision,pay close attention to the parts usedin the repair and the quality of thework.

Make sure the repair facility usesAcura replacement body parts. Somecompanies make sheet metal piecesthat seem to duplicate the originalAcura body parts, but are actuallyinferior in fit, finish, and corrosionresistance. Once installed, they donot give the same high-qualityappearance.

When reporting your collision to theinsurance company, tell them youwant Acura parts used in the repair.Although most insurers recognizethe quality of original parts, somemay try to specify that the repairs bedone with other available parts. Youshould investigate this before anyrepairs have begun.

Take your vehicle to your authorizedAcura dealer for inspection after therepairs are completed. Your dealercan make sure that quality materialswere used, and that corrosion-preventive coatings were applied toall repaired and replaced parts.

Body Repairs

Appearance Care358

This section covers the more-common problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your vehicle towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 360....................Changing a Flat Tire . 361

..........If Your Engine Won’t Start . 368Nothing Happens or the

Starter Motor Operates........................Very Slowly . 368

The Starter Operates................................Normally . 368................................Jump Starting . 369

............If Your Engine Overheats . 371.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 373..........Charging System Indicator . 374

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 375...............Brake System Indicator . 377

..................Closing the Moonroof . 378..............................................Fuses . 379

..........Checking and Replacing . 380......................Emergency Towing . 385

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Taking Care of the Unexpected 359

Your vehicle has a compact sparetire that takes up less space. Use thisspare tire as a temporary replace-ment only. Get your regular tirerepaired or replaced and put it backon your vehicle as soon as you can.

The compact spare tire has a shortertread life than a regular tire. Replaceit when you can see the tread wearindicator bars. The replacementshould be the same size and designtire, mounted on the same wheel.The compact spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the compact wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some road sur-faces than the regular tire. Usegreater caution while driving onthis tire.

Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)under any circumstances.

Follow these precautions wheneveryou are using the compact spare tire:

Do not mount snow chains on thecompact spare.

Do not use the compact spare tireif you are towing a trailer.

The wheel of the compact sparetire is designed especially to fityour vehicle. Do not use yourspare tire on another vehicleunless it is the same make andmodel.

Compact Spare Tire

Taking Care of the Unexpected360

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Stopping in traffic or on the shoulderof a busy road is dangerous. Driveslowly along the shoulder until youget to an exit or an area to stop thatis far away from the traffic lanes.

Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0). Have all thepassengers get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tire.

Park the vehicle on firm, level, andnon-slippery ground away fromtraffic. Put the transmission inPark. Apply the parking brake.

2.1.

CONTINUED

Changing a Flat Tire


JACK

TOOLS SPARE TIRE

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.

Open the tailgate. Take the tools out of the storagecompartment.

Turn the jack’s end bracketcounterclockwise to loosen it, thenremove the jack.

The tools and jack are behind acover in the cargo area on thedriver’s side. Remove the cover bypushing the top of the cover.

The spare tire is storedunderneath the rear cargo area.Remove the plastic cover on thecargo area lining to access theshaft for the spare tire hoist.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.



COVER COVER

Loosen the five wheel nuts 1/2turn with the wheel wrench.

Put the wheel nut wrench on thehoist shaft. Turn the wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thespare tire to the ground.

Keep turning the wheel wrench tocreate slack in the cable.

Remove the bracket from thespare tire.

11.

10.

8. 9.

CONTINUED



SPARE TIRE WRENCH BRACKET

△

Use the extension and wheelwrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

Remove the wheel nuts, thenremove the flat tire. Temporarilyplace the flat tire on the groundwith the outside surface of thewheel facing up. You could scratchthe wheel if you put it face down.

Locate the jacking point nearestthe tire you need to change. It ispointed to by a mark moldedinto the underside of the body.Place the jack under the jackingpoint. Turn the end bracketclockwise until the top of the jackcontacts the jacking point. Makesure the jacking point tab isresting in the jack notch.

12. 13. 14.



JACKING POINT WHEEL WRENCH

EXTENSION

CONTINUED

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully, it may be hot fromdriving.

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tightenthem fully.

Lower the vehicle to the groundand remove the jack.

15. 16. 17.



BRAKE HUB

Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Remove the center cap from theflat tire.

Place the flat tire face up underthe hoist.

Slowly turn the wheel wrenchclockwise to take up the slack ofthe hoist cable. Make sure thebracket is seated in the centerhole of the spare tire.

Turn the wheel wrench clockwiseuntil the flat tire rests against theunderbody of the vehicle and youhear the hoist click.

Insert the hoist bracket into thecenter hole of the flat tire.

18.

19.

20.

21.

22.

23.



80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)

Store the jack in its holder. Turnthe jack’s end bracket to lock it inplace. Store the tools, and installthe cover.

24.



Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

Always raise the spare tire hoist, evenif you are not stowing a tire. If thehoist is lef t down, it will be damagedduring driving and need to be replaced.

Diagnosing why your engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn thekey to START (III):

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

When you turn the ignition switch toSTART (III), you do not hear thenormal noise of the engine trying tostart. You may hear a clicking soundor series of clicks, or nothing at all.Check these things:

Check the transmission interlock.The transmission must be in Parkor Neutral or the starter will notoperate.

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).Turn on the headlights and checktheir brightness. If the headlightsare very dim or don’t light at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .

Turn the ignition switch to START(III). If the headlights do not dim,check the condition of the fuses. Ifthe fuses are OK, there is proba-bly something wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified technician todetermine the problem. (See

on page .)

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery is dis-charged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition ofthe battery and terminal connec-tions (see page ). You canthen try jump starting the vehiclefrom a booster battery (see page

).

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to START (III), butthe engine does not run.

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

369

385

326

369

252

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Jump Starting

Emergency Towing

The Starter Operates Normally

Starting theEngine


If Your Engine Won’t Start

368

To jump start your vehicle, followthese directions closely:If your vehicle’s battery has run

down, you may be able to start theengine by using a booster battery.Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions.

Put the transmission in Neutral orPark, and set the parking brake.

Open the hood and check thephysical condition of the battery(see page ). In very coldweather, check the condition ofthe electrolyte. If it seems slushyor like ice, do not try jump startinguntil it thaws.

Turn off all the electrical acces-sories: heater, A/C, climatecontrol, stereo system, lights, etc.You cannot start your Acura by

pushing or pulling it.

Your vehicle has the ImmobilizerSystem. You should use aproperly-coded master or valet keyto start the engine (see page ).A key that is not properly codedwill cause the immobilizer systemindicator in the dash panel to blinkrapidly.

Do you have fuel? Turn theignition switch to ON (II) for aminute and watch the fuel gauge.The low fuel level warning lightmay not be working, so you werenot reminded to fill the tank.

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .

1.

2.

91

380

252

326

CONTINUED

Jump Starting

EmergencyTowing

If Your Engine Won’t Start, Jump Starting


A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

＋

＋

－

Start your vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthe jumper cable connections tomake sure they have good metal-to-metal contact.

Once your vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromyour vehicle, then from thebooster battery. Disconnect thepositive cable from your vehicle,then the booster battery.

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourAcura’s battery. Connect the otherend to the positive ( ) terminalon the booster battery.

Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

The numbers in the illustration showyou the order to connect the jumpercables.

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

5.

7.

3.

4.

6.


Jump Starting

370

BOOSTER BATTERY

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine.

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading(climbing a long, steep hill on ahot day with the A/C running, forexample), the engine should startto cool down almost immediately.If it does, wait until the tempera-ture gauge comes down to the mid-point then continue driving.

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in Neutral orPark and set the parking brake.Turn off the heating and cooling/climate control system and allother accessories. Turn on thehazard warning indicators.

Keep the ends of the jumper cablesaway from each other and any metalon the vehicle until all aredisconnected. Otherwise, you maycause an electrical short.

The pointer of your vehicle’stemperature gauge should stay inthe midrange under most conditions.It may go higher if you are driving upa long steep hill on a very hot day. Ifit climbs to the red mark, you shoulddetermine the reason.

Your vehicle can overheat for severalreasons, such as lack of coolant or amechanical problem. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.In either case, you should takeimmediate action.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED


Jump Starting, If Your Engine Overheats

If Your Engine Overheats

371

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.Driving with the temperature gauge

pointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to your engine.

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Wait until you see no more signsof steam or spray, then open thehood.

If you don’t find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank (see page

). If the level is below theMIN mark, add coolant to halfwaybetween the MIN and MAX marks.

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may also have toadd coolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointer

reaches the middle of the tempera-ture gauge, or lower, before check-ing the radiator.

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. Thisreleases any remaining pressure inthe cooling system. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap and turn it until it comesoff.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

Start the engine and set thetemperature control dial tomaximum (climate control toFULL AUTO at 90°F/32°C). Addcoolant to the radiator up to thebase of the filler neck. If you donot have the proper coolantmixture available, you can addplain water. Remember to havethe cooling system drained andrefilled with the proper mixture assoon as you can.

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine and watchthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair. (See

on page .)

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

385

241 385


If Your Engine Overheats

EmergencyTowing

EmergencyTowing

372

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

This indicator should light when theignition switch is ON (II), and go outafter the engine starts. It shouldnever come on when the engine isrunning. If it starts flashing, itindicates that the oil pressuredropped very low for a moment, thenrecovered. If the indicator stays onwith the engine running, it showsthat the engine has lost oil pressureand serious engine damage ispossible. In either case, you shouldtake immediate action.

Safely pull off the road and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning indicators.

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood and check the oillevel (see page ). Although oillevel and oil pressure are notdirectly connected, an engine thatis very low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

Start the engine and watch the oilpressure indicator. If the lightdoes not go out within ten seconds,turn off the engine. There is amechanical problem that needs tobe repaired before you cancontinue driving. (See

on page .)1.

2.

3.

4.

240

307

385

Low Oil Pressure Indicator


EmergencyTowing

373

LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe vehicle stopped.

This indicator should come on whenthe ignition switch is ON (II), and goout after the engine starts. If itcomes on brightly when the engineis running, it indicates that thecharging system has stoppedcharging the battery.

By eliminating as much of theelectrical load as possible, you candrive several miles (kilometers)before the battery is too dischargedto keep the engine running. Drive toa service station or garage whereyou can get technical assistance.

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories: radio, heater, A/C,climate control, rear defogger, cruisecontrol, etc. Try not to use otherelectrically-operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning and take extra care not tostall it. Starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.


Charging System Indicator

374

CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR

If the indicator remains on past threedriving trips, or the fuel cap was notloose or missing, have the vehiclechecked by the dealer as soon aspossible. Drive moderately until thedealer has inspected the problem.Avoid full-throttle acceleration anddriving at high speed.

You should also have the dealerinspect your vehicle if this indicatorcomes on repeatedly, even though itmay turn off as you continue driving.

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch ON (II), andgoes off after the engine starts. If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates one of the engine’semissions control systems may havea problem. Even though you mayfeel no difference in your vehicle’sperformance, it can reduce your fueleconomy and cause your vehicle toput out excessive emissions.Continued operation may causeserious damage.

If you have recently refueled yourvehicle, the cause of this indicatorcoming on could be a loose ormissing fuel fill cap. Check the capand tighten it until it clicks severaltimes. Replace the fuel fill cap if it ismissing. Tightening the cap will notmake the indicator turn offimmediately; it takes at least threedriving trips. This indicator may also come on

along with the ‘‘D ’’ indicator.5

Malfunction Indicator Lamp


MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

If you keep driving with themalf unction indicator lamp on, you candamage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols and engine. Those repairs maynot be covered by your vehicle’swarranties.

Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

If your vehicle’s battery has beendisconnected or gone dead, thesecodes are erased. It takes severaldays of driving under variousconditions to set the codes again.

If possible, do not take your vehiclefor a state emissions test until thereadiness codes are set. To check ifthey are set, turn the ignition ON (II),but do not start the engine. TheMalfunction Indicator Lamp willcome on for 20 seconds. If it thengoes off, the readiness codes are set.If it blinks 5 times, the readinesscodes are not set. Drive your vehicleas usual for one or two weeks, thencheck again. If the readiness codesare still not set, see your Acuradealer.


Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Readiness Codes

376

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. Because of thebrake system’s dual-circuit design, aproblem in one part of the systemwill still give you braking at twowheels. You will feel the brake pedalgo down much farther before thevehicle begins to slow down, and youwill have to press harder on thepedal. The distance needed to stopwill be much longer.

If it comes on at any other time, itindicates a problem with the vehicle’sbrake system. In most cases, theproblem is a low fluid level in thebrake fluid reservoir. Press lightly onthe brake pedal to see if it feelsnormal. If it does, check the brakefluid level the next time you stop at aservice station (see page ). If thefluid level is low, take the vehicle toyour dealer and have the brakesystem inspected for leaks or wornbrake pads.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of thelonger distance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed, and repaired assoon as possible. (See

on page .)

If you must drive the vehicle a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and cautiously.

The Brake System Indicator comeson when you turn the ignition ON(II). If the parking brake is not set, itgoes off after you start the engine. Ifthe parking brake is set, it goes offwhen you fully release the parkingbrake with the engine running.

319385

EmergencyTowing

Brake System Indicator


U. S. indicator shown

BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR

If the electric motor will not closethe moonroof, do the following:

Check the fuse for the moonroofmotor (see page ). If the fuseis blown, replace it with one of thesame or lower rating.

Try closing the moonroof. If thenew fuse blows immediately or themoonroof motor still does notoperate, you can close themoonroof manually.

Get the moonroof wrench out ofthe tool kit in the cargo area.

To remove the round plug in thecenter of the headliner, turn theplug by using a screwdriver orcoin, then pry it out. Make sure toalign the tabs on the round plug tothe notches on the ceilling asshown in the illustration.

Insert the moonroof wrench intothe socket behind this plug. Turnthe wrench until the moonroof isfully closed.

Remove the wrench. Reinstall theround plug.

1.380

2.

3.

6.

5.4.


Closing the Moonroof

378

TAB

NOTCH

ROUND PLUG

SOCKET

All the electrical circuits in yourvehicle have fuses to protect themfrom a short circuit or overload.These fuses are located in three fuseboxes.

The interior fuse boxes are locatedunderneath the dashboard on eachside.

To open the fuse box on thepassenger’s side, pull the right edgeof the cover.

Fuses


DRIVER’S SIDE INTERIOR PASSENGER’S SIDE INTERIOR

If something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, the first thingyou should check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages

and , or the diagram on thefuse box lid (the diagram for thedriver’s side interior fuse box is onthe kick panel below the fuse box),which fuse or fuses control thatcomponent. Check those fuses first,but check all the fuses beforedeciding that a blown fuse is not thecause. Replace any blown fuses andcheck the component’s operation.

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK(0). Make sure the headlights andall other accessories are off.

Remove the cover from the fusebox.

The secondary fuse box is in theengine compartment next to thebattery.

The primary under-hood fuse box islocated in the back of the enginecompartment on the passenger’s side.To open it, push the tabs as shown. 1.

2.

383 384

Checking and Replacing Fuses

Fuses


UNDER-HOODUNDER-HOOD

Look for a burned wire inside thefuse. If it is burned, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower.

Check each of the large fuses inthe primary under-hood fuse boxby looking through the top at thewire inside. Removing these fusesrequires a Phillips-head screw-driver.

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse boxes bypulling out each fuse with the fusepuller provided in the primaryunder-hood fuse box.

5.4.3.

CONTINUED

Fuses


BLOWN FUSE PULLER

BLOWN

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem in your vehicle.Leave the blown fuse in thatcircuit and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified mechanic.

If the radio fuse is removed, theaudio system will disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio youwill see ‘‘ ’’ in the frequencydisplay. Use the Preset buttons toenter the five-digit code (see page

).

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits. Makesure you can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the accessorypower socket or radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

6.

182

Fuses


Replacing a f use with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have a replace-ment f use with the proper rating f or thecircuit, install one with a lower rating.

－

No. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits ProtectedAmps.

CONTINUED

No.No. Amps. Amps.Circuits Protected Circuits Protected

123456789

10111213

Spare FuseSpare FuseRight HeadlightACG SHazardNot usedStopLeft HeadlightRadioPower Window MotorRear A/CRear DefrosterBack Up, ACC

1415161718192021222324

40 A40 A30 A

7.5 A10 A15 A

120 A30 A

7.5 A50 A20 A

Power SeatHeater MotorCooling FanSpare FuseSpare FuseSpare FuseBatteryCondenser FanMG ClutchIGI MainFog Lights

20 A30 A20 A15 A15 A

20 A20 A20 A40 A30 A30 A40 A

6789

10

12345

20 A40 A30 A20 A20 A

15 A15 A15 A7.5 A20 A

Rear Entertainment SystemVSA F/S RelayVSA Motor4WDRear Accessory Socket

ETCIG CoilLAFFI-Back-upP/W DR

Fuses


PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

＊

＊

＊

＊

No.Amps.No. Amps.Circuits Protected Circuits Protected

12345

67

8

910111213141516

15 A10 A

7.5 A

7.5 A10 A

15 A7.5 A7.5 A10 A

7.5 A15 A30 A

7.5 A

123

45

6789

10111213

On Canadian models

30 A20 A20 A20 A20 A

10 A20 A

20 A

15 A15 A10 A20 A

7.5 A20 A20 A20 A

Fuel PumpSRSHeater Control, A/C ClutchRelay, Cooling Fan RelayPower MirrorDaytime Running Light /Rear WiperECU (PCM), Cruise ControlOPDSACC RelayBack-up Lights, InstrumentLightsTurn SignalsIG CoilFront WiperStarter Signal

Moonroof

Driver’s Power Seat SlidingPassenger’s Power SeatRecliningDaytime Running LightDriver’s side Rear PowerWindowFront Passenger’s PowerWindowFront Accessory SocketSmall LightInterior LightPower Door LockBack Up, ClockHeated SeatDriver’s Power WindowPassenger’s Side RearPower Window

Canadian models:

Driver’s Power Seat RecliningPassenger’s Power Seat Sliding

Fuses


Driver’s Side

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

Passenger’s Side

FrontFront

:

－

－

－

If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service or,if you belong to one, an organizationthat provides roadside assistance.Never tow your vehicle behindanother vehicle with just a rope orchain. It is very dangerous.

There are three popular types ofprofessional towing equipment.

The operatorloads your vehicle on the back of atruck.

Any othermethod of towing will damage thedrive system. When you contact thetowing agency, inform them that aflat-bed is required.

The towtruck uses two pivoting arms that gounder the tires (front or rear) and liftthem off the ground. The other twotires remain on the ground.

Refer toon page

for non-emergency towinginformation.

The towtruck uses metal cables with hookson the ends. These hooks go aroundparts of the frame or suspension andcables lift that end of the vehicle offthe ground. Your vehicle’ssuspension and body can beseriously damaged.

283

Flat-bed Equipment

Wheel Lift Equipment

Sling-type Equipment

This is the only way totransport your vehicle.

Never tow your vehicle withwheel lif t equipment.

Towing Your VehicleBehind a Motorhome

This method oftowing your MDX is unacceptable.

Emergency Towing


Towing a MDX with only two tires onthe ground will damage parts of the4WD system. It should be transportedon a f lat-bed truck or trailer.

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour Acura, and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 388................................Specifications . 390

..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 392Uniform Tire Quality

..................................Grading . 392.................................Treadwear . 392

......................................Traction . 392.............................Temperature . 393...........................Tire Information . 394

.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 395......Driving in Foreign Countries . 396

.......................Emissions Controls . 397.....................The Clean Air Act . 397

Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 397

Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 397

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 397

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 398....................PGM-FI System . 398

Ignition Timing Control................................System . 398

Exhaust Gas Recirculation...................(EGR) System . 398

Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 398

....................Replacement Parts . 398..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 399

Technical Information

Technical Information 387

Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers located in various places.

The Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourAcura dealer uses to register yourvehicle for warranty purposes. It isalso necessary for licensing andinsuring your vehicle. The easiestplace to find the VIN is on a platefastened to the top of the dashboard.You can see it by looking throughthe windshield on the driver’s side. Itis also on the Certification label at-tached to the driver’s doorjamb, andis stamped on the engine com-partment bulkhead. The VIN is alsoprovided in bar code on theCertification label.

Identif ication Numbers

Technical Information388

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

CERTIFICATION LABEL

The Transmission Number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

The Engine Number is stamped intothe engine block. It is on the front.

Identif ication Numbers


ENGINE NUMBER

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER

－－

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊

＊

＊

Specifications


Dimensions

Air Conditioning

Weights

Capacities

LengthWidthHeight

WheelbaseTrack

See the tire information label atta-ched to the driver’s doorjamb.

1.88 US gal (7.1 )2.38 US gal (9.0 )

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

4.2 US qt (4.0 )

5.3 US qt (5.0 )2.9 US qt (2.7 )7.7 US qt (7.3 )

19.21 US gal (72.7 )188.5 in (4,789 mm)76.3 in (1,938 mm)68.7 in (1,744 mm)71.3 in (1,811 mm)106.3 in (2,700 mm)66.3 in (1,685 mm)66.5 in (1,690 mm)

9,700 lbs (4,400 kg)

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type

HFC-134a (R-134a)24.7 26.5 oz (700 750 g)

ND-OIL8

Gross vehicle weight rating

Gross combined weightrating (GCWR)

2.9 US qt (2.7 )3.0 US qt (2.8 )

0.45 US qt (0.43 )0.48 US qt (0.45 )

Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.0.16 US gal (0.6 )

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengine.Reserve tank capacity:

Fuel tank

EnginecoolantEngine oil

AutomatictransmissionfluidReardifferentialfluidTransferassemblyfluidWindshieldwasherreservoir

4.8 US qt (4.5 )

Approx.

FrontRear

1 :

2 :

StandardPremium

Equipped with transmission fluid cooler and power steering fluidcooler.The GCWR must be reduced 2 percent for every 1,000 feet (305meters) of elevation.

1 :

2 :

ChangeTotalChange

IncludingfilterWithoutfilter

TotalChangeTotal

ChangeTotal

ChangeTotal

2 1

1

2

－－

－－－－

－－－－－－－－－－－－－

－

Specifications


Tires

Alignment

Engine

Fuses

Battery

Lights

60 W (HB3)12 V

Size

Pressure60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

T155/90D16 110MP235/65R17 103T

Toe-in

Camber

Caster 1°53’0°50’0°50’

0.00 in (0.0 mm)0.00 in (0.0 mm)

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs

10.0 : 1211.8 cu-in (3,471 cm )

3.50 x 3.66 in (89.0 x 93.0 mm)

Interior

Under-hood

12 V 51 W (HB4)3 CP

12 V 50 CP

12 V 51 W (HB4)12 V 2 CP (3.8 W)12 V 24 CP (27 W)12 V 21 W/5 W12 V 21 CP (18 W)12 V 3 CP12 V 21 W12 V 6.2 W12 V 7 W

5 W5 W1.1 W3.8 W

Capacity

12 V

12 V12 V12 V12 V

12 V 20 AH/5 HR

Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC,V6 gasoline engine

Headlights

Front side marker lightsFront turn signal lights/Parking lightsFog lightRear side marker lightsRear turn signal/hazard lightsBrake/TaillightsBackup lightsLicense plate lightsHigh-mount brake lightIndividual map lights

Cargo area lightTailgate lightVanity mirror lightDoor light

See page 384 or the fuse labelattached to the dashboard.See page 384 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox door under the dashboard.See page 383 or the fuse boxcover.

See spark plug maintenancesection page 325 .

Front/RearSpareFront/RearSpare

FrontRearFrontRearFront

FrontRear

Driver’s side

Passenger’s side

HighLow

－The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

The tires on your vehicle meet allU.S. Federal Safety Requirements.All tires are also graded fortreadwear, traction, and temperatureperformance according toDepartment of Transportation(DOT) standards. The followingexplains these gradings.

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and themaximum section width. Forexample:

All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.


DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Treadwear

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Traction AA, A, B, C

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

392

－The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and not over-loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, cancause heat buildup and possible tirefailure.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)


Temperature A, B, C

393

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－The tires that came on your car havea number of markings. Those youshould be aware of are describedbelow.

Whenever tires are replaced, theyshould be replaced with tires of thesame size. Following is an exampletire size with an explanation of whateach component means.

Vehicle type (P indicatespassenger vehicle).

Tire width in millimeters.

Aspect ratio (the tire’s sectionheight as a percentage of itswidth).

Tire construction code (Rindicates radial).

Load index (a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry).

Rim diameter in inches.

Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

Tire Identification Number (TIN) isa group of numbers and letters thatlook like the following example TIN.

This indicates that the tiremeets all requirements ofthe U.S. Department ofTransportation.

Manufacturer’sidentification mark.

Tire type code.

Date of manufacture.

P

225

55

R

94

V

16

DOT

B97R

FW6X

2202


Tire Information

Tire Labeling

Tire Size

Tire Identif ication Number

394

DOT B97R FW6X 2202

P225/55R16 94V

Some conventional gasolines arebeing blended with alcohol or anether compound. These gasolinesare collectively referred to asoxygenated fuels. To meet clean airstandards, some areas of the UnitedStates and Canada use oxygenatedfuels to help reduce emissions.

If you use an oxygenated fuel, besure it is unleaded and meets theminimum octane rating requirement.

Before using an oxygenated fuel, tryto confirm the fuel’s contents. Somestates/provinces require thisinformation to be posted on thepump.

The following are the U.S. EPA andCanadian CGSB approvedpercentages of oxygenates:

(Methyl Tertiary ButylEther)You may use gasoline containing upto 15 percent MTBE by volume.

(ethyl or grain alcohol)You may use gasoline containing upto 10 percent ethanol by volume.Gasoline containing ethanol may bemarketed under the name ‘‘Gasohol.’’

(methyl or woodalcohol)Your vehicle was not designed to usefuel that contains methanol.Methanol can corrode metal parts inthe fuel system, and also damageplastic and rubber components. Thisdamage would not be covered byyour warranties.

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

Fuel system damage or performanceproblems resulting from the use ofan oxygenated fuel containing morethan the percentages of oxygenatesgiven above are not covered underwarranty.MTBE

ETHANOL

METHANOL

Oxygenated Fuels


If you are planning to take yourAcura outside the U.S., contact thetourist bureaus in the areas you willbe traveling in to find out about theavailability of unleaded gasoline withthe proper octane rating.

If unleaded gasoline is not available,be aware that using leaded gasolinein your Acura will affect perfor-mance and fuel mileage, and damageits emissions controls. It will nolonger comply with U.S. andCanadian emissions regulations, andwill be illegal to operate in NorthAmerica. To bring your vehicle backinto compliance will require the re-placement of several components,such as the oxygen sensors and thethree way catalytic converter. Thesereplacements are not covered underwarranty.

Driving in Foreign Countries


＊

＊

The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle’s engine produces several by-products. Some of these are carbonmonoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen(NOx) and hydrocarbons (HC).Gasoline evaporating from the tankalso produces hydrocarbons. Con-trolling the production of NOx, CO,and HC is important to the environ-ment. Under certain conditions ofsunlight and climate, NOx and HCreact to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’Carbon monoxide does not contri-bute to smog creation, but it is apoisonous gas.

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.Scheduled maintenance is on page

.

In Canada, Acura vehicles complywith the Canadian emissionrequirements, as specified in anagreement with EnvironmentCanada, at the time they aremanufactured.

Your vehicle has a PositiveCrankcase Ventilation System. Thiskeeps gasses that build up in theengine’s crankcase from going intothe atmosphere. The Positive Crank-

case Ventilation valve routes themfrom the crankcase back to theintake manifold. They are thendrawn into the engine and burned.

The Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

296

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Emissions Controls


The exhaust emissions controlsinclude four systems: PGM-FI,Ignition Timing Control, ExhaustGas Recirculation and Three WayCatalytic Converter. These foursystems work together to control theengine’s combustion and minimizethe amount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcomes out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.The PGM-FI System uses sequential

multiport fuel injection.It has three subsystems: Air Intake,Engine Control, and Fuel Control.The Powertrain Control Module(PCM) uses various sensors todetermine how much air is goinginto the engine. It then controls howmuch fuel to inject under all operat-ing conditions.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO, and NOx produced.

The Exhaust Gas Recirculation(EGR) system takes some of theexhaust gas and routes it back intothe intake manifold. Adding exhaustgas to the air/fuel mixture reducesthe amount of NOx produced whenthe fuel is burned.

The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), dinitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to work to-gether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newAcura replacement parts or theirequivalent for repairs. Using lowerquality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.

2

2

Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts

PGM-FI System

Ignition Timing Control System

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

Emissions Controls


A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your vehicle’s three waycatalytic converter.

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire any com-bustible materials that come near it.Park your vehicle away from highgrass, dry leaves, or other flamma-bles.

The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Acura partor its equivalent.

Keep the engine tuned-up.

Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

Three Way Catalytic Converter


THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER

Customer Relations................................Information . 402

....................Warranty Coverages . 403Reporting Safety Defects

..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 404.....................Authorized Manuals . 405

Warranty and Customer Relations

Warranty and Customer Relations 401

Acura dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. TheService Manager or GeneralManager can help. Almost allproblems are solved in this way.

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact the AcuraCustomer Relations Office.

U.S. Owners:

When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Vehicle Identification Number(see page )Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicleDate of purchaseMileage on your vehicleYour name, address, and tele-phone numberA detailed description of theproblemName of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

Vortex Motor Corp.Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel:(787) 250-4327

Canadian Owners:

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel:1-888-9-ACURA-9Fax:Toll-free 1-877-939-0909

Toronto (416) 287-4776

388

Customer Relations Information

Warranty and Customer Relations402

CUSTOMER RELATIONS

RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÉLE

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.Acura Client ServicesMail Stop 500-2N-7E1919 Torrance Blvd.Torrance, CA 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 382-2238

－

－－

－

－

－

－

－

－a seat

belt that fails to function properly iscovered for the useful life of thevehicle.

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

coversyour new vehicle, except for thebattery, emissions control systems,and accessories, against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’s emis-sions control systems. Time, mileage,and coverage are conditional. Pleaseread the warranty manual for exactinformation.

this warranty gives upto 100 percent credit toward areplacement battery.

Your new Acura is covered by thesewarranties:

Acura accessories are covered underthis warranty. Time and mileagelimits depend on the type ofaccessory and other factors. Pleaseread your warranty manual fordetails.

covers all Acurareplacement parts against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from an Acura dealer.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2003 Acura Warranty Informationbooklet that came with your car forprecise information on warrantycoverages. Your Acura’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warrantyinformation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2003 WarrantyManual that came with your vehicle.

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited WarrantyNew Car Limited Warranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

Warranty Coverages

Warranty and Customer Relations 403

To contact NHTSA, you may eithercall the Auto Safety Hotline toll-freeat 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 inWashington D.C. area) or write to:NHTSA, U.S. Department ofTransportation, Washington,D.C. 20590. You can also obtainother information about motorvehicle safety from the Hotline.

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying Acura AutomobileDivision, American Honda Motor Co.,Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, or AcuraAutomobile Division, AmericanHonda Motor Co., Inc.

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

Warranty and Customer Relations404

－

＊

＊

＊

＊２００３

ＡＣＵ

Valid only for sales within the U.S. Canadian owners shouldcontact their authorized Acura dealer.The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm

Incorporated. You can order in any of three ways:Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this pageCall Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356Go online at

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356

(credit card orders only)

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)

Authorized Manuals

405

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356

OR

(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)

MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00

Publication

Form Number

61S3V02

61S3V02EL

61S3V30

31S3V620

31S3V820

31S3V900

31S3VQ00

ACU-R

Form Description

2003 Acura MDX Service Manual

2001-03 Acura MDX

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2001-03 Acura MDX

Body Repair Manual

2003 Acura MDX Owner’s Manual

2003 Acura MDX

Navigation Manual

2003 Acura MDX Maintenance Journal

2003 Acura MDX Quick Start Guide

Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

Price

Each

$69.00

$47.00

$44.00

$37.00

$29.00

$10.00

$10.00

FREE

PUBLICATION NUMBERVEHICLE MODEL

Name YearQty

Price

Each

Total

Price

GRAND TOTAL

HANDLING CHARGE

Mich. Purchases

Add 6% Sales Tax

TOTAL MATERIAL

$6.00

Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST

By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You canpay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail toHelm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurring obligation.

Orders are mailed within 10 days. Pleaseallow adequate time for delivery.

Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurringobligation.

www. helminc. com

－

－

－

ＳＨＩＰ

ＴＯ

ＰＡＹＭＥＮＴ

This manual complements the Service Manual byproviding in-depth troubleshooting information for eachelectrical circuit in your vehicle.

This manual describes the procedures involved in thereplacement of damaged body parts.

This manual covers maintenance and recommendedprocedures for repair to engine and chassis components.It is written for the Journeyman mechanic, but is simpleenough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-stand.

Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

Authorized Manuals

406

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment shouldbe sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shownbelow for a quotation.

P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356

Customer Name Attention

Apartment Number

State & Zip CodeCity

Daytime Telephone Number

Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.Do not send cash

MasterCard

VISA Check here if your billing address is differentfrom the shipping address shown above.

Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr.

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE

Street Address No P.O. Box Number

( )

These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.

CONTINUED

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 68, 374............................Jump Starting . 369

..............................Maintenance . 326............................Specifications . 391

..............................Before Driving . 235....................................Belts, Seat . 8, 46

.........................Beverage Holders . 121

...................................Body Repair . 358Brakes

...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 263.............Break-in, New Linings . 236

...........................................Fluid . 319....................Bulb Replacement . 344

.......................................Parking . 117.................System Indicator . 69, 377........................Wear Indicators . 262

.............................Braking System . 262.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 236

..Brightness Control, Instruments . 82........................Brights, Headlights . 79

...Accessories and Modifications . 243................................Accessories . 243

...Additional Safety Precaution . 244............................Modifications . 244

ACCESSORY (Ignition Key.......................................Position) . 93

............Accessory Power Sockets . 125....................Additives, Engine Oil . 308

...............................Airbag (SRS) . 9, 50.....................Air Cleaner Element . 321

..............Air Conditioning System . 136..............................Maintenance . 330

.....................Rear A/C Control . 142.........................................Usage . 136

.......................Air Outlets (Vents) . 134

.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 332

.......................Alcohol in Gasoline . 395.......Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning . 353

......................................Antifreeze . 311Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

....................Indicator Light . 69, 264...................................Operation . 263

..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 182.Anti-theft Steering Column Lock . 92

..........................Appearance Care . 351................Audio System . 149, 163, 183

...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 48.........................Automatic Lighting . 80

...Automatic Lighting Off Feature . 81.............Automatic Speed Control . 216..............Automatic Transmission . 253

..........................Capacity, Fluid . 390...............Checking Fluid Level . 317

.......................................Shifting . 254.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 253

................Shift Lever Positions . 254....................Shift Lock Release . 257

...........................Automatic Wipers . 85

Index

A

B

I

＊

Bulb Replacement..........................Back-up Lights . 344

..............................Brake Lights . 344......................Cargo Area Light . 347

................Front Parking Lights . 342........Front Side Marker Lights . 342

.................................Headlights . 341.........High-mount Brake Light . 345

..............Individual Map Lights . 346...................License Plate Light . 346

.................................Rear Bulbs . 344............................Specifications . 391

............Turn Signal Lights . 342, 344..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 341

................DANGER, Explanation of . ii...................................Dashboard . 2, 66

................Daytime Running Lights . 82

................................Cancel Button . 218............................Capacities Chart . 390

.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 62..........................Cargo Area Light . 130

.............................Carrying Cargo . 245Cassette Player

............................................Care . 180...................Operation . 151, 177, 191

..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii

...................................CD Changer . 155..............................CD Player . 171, 194

........................Certification Label . 388............................................Chains . 338

Change Oil........................................How to . 309......................................When to . 296

....................Changing a Flat Tire . 361............Changing Engine Coolant . 313

...Charging System Indicator . 68, 374............Checklist, Before Driving . 251

..................Childproof Door Locks . 99.....................................Child Safety . 21

.......................................Child Seats . 21..........Tether Anchorage Points . 42

....................Cleaner Element, Air . 321Cleaning

....................Aluminum Wheels . 353...................................Carpeting . 354

......................................Exterior . 352.........................................Fabric . 355.......................................Interior . 354.......................................Leather . 355

...................................Seat Belts . 355...........................................Vinyl . 355

....................................Windows . 356

...............Climate Control System . 134......................................Coat Hook . 127

.....................Code, Audio System . 182........................CO in the Exhaust . 397

........................................Coin Box . 127............Cold Weather, Starting in . 252

..............................Compact Spare . 361...............Consumer Information . 402

.............Controls, Instruments and . 65Coolant

........................................Adding . 311....................................Checking . 241

.........................Proper Solution . 311...................................Replacing . 313

...................Temperature Gauge . 75....................Corrosion Protection . 357

Crankcase Emissions Control........................................System . 397

............Cruise Control Operation . 216..........Customer Relations Office . 402

Index

C

D

II

CONTINUED

............................Fabric, Cleaning . 355...................................Fan, Interior . 138

Features, Comfort and..............................Convenience . 133

....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 237Filters

...............................................Air . 321.......................Air Conditioning . 331

...............................................Oil . 309

............Defects, Reporting Safety . 404................Defogger, Rear Window . 88..............Defrosting the Windows . 140

..........................Differential Fluid . 318..........................Digital Clock . 150, 190

....................................Dimensions . 390...............Dimming the Headlights . 79

Dipstick..........Automatic Transmission . 317

..................................Engine Oil . 240..........................Directional Signals . 83

........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 262.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 310

Doors..............Locking and Unlocking . 93

....................Lockout Prevention . 94......................Power Door Locks . 93

..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 392.....................................Drive Belts . 331

...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5...........................................Driving . 249

....................................Economy . 242.........................In Bad Weather . 269

................In Foreign Countries . 396Driving Position Memory

........................................System . 118

..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 331...................................DVD Player . 199

..............................Economy, Fuel . 242............Emergencies on the Road . 359.............Battery, Jump Starting . 369...........Brake System Indicator . 377

................Changing a Flat Tire . 361.....Charging System Indicator . 374

..................Checking the Fuses . 380.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 373...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 375

..................Overheated Engine . 371.........................Emergency Brake . 117

......................Emergency Flashers . 87......................Emergency Towing . 385.......................Emissions Controls . 397

Engine....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 75

.................................Drive Belts . 331Malfunction Indicator

................................Lamp . 68, 375........Oil Pressure Indicator . 68, 373..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 307

...............................Overheating . 371............................Specifications . 391............................Speed Limiter . 257

.......................................Starting . 252......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 395

.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 397...............................Exhaust Fumes . 62

Exhaust Gas Recirculation........................................System . 398

Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat........................................Belts by . 19

..................Exterior, Cleaning the . 354

Index

E

F

III

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 341..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 87

........................................Headlights . 79........................................Aiming . 341

....................Automatic Lighting . 80..............Automatic Lighting Off . 81............Daytime Running Lights . 82

..................High Beam Indicator . 71...........High Beams, Turning on . 79............Low Beams, Turning on . 79

.........................Reminder Chime . 79........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 341

...................................Turning on . 79............................Head Restraints . 105

...............................Heated Mirror . 117.....................Heating and Cooling . 134

.............High Altitude, Starting at . 252.................High-Low Beam Switch . 79

HomeLink Universal................................Transceiver . 229

....................................Hood Latch . 323.......................Hood, Opening the . 238

..................................................Horn . 78.................................Hydroplaning . 270

.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 87...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 361

Fluids..........Automatic Transmission . 317

..........................................Brake . 319..........................Power Steering . 320

...................Transfer Assembly . 318..................Windshield Washer . 316

FM Stereo Radio...................................Reception . 169

........................................Fog Lights . 88..............Folding the Second Seat . 106

.................Folding the Third Seat . 107.....Foreign Countries, Driving in . 396

..........................Four-way Flashers . 87.................................................Fuel . 236

......................Fill Door and Cap . 237...........................................Gauge . 75

................Octane Requirement . 236...............................Oxygenated . 395

........................Reserve Indicator . 71........................Tank, Filling the . 237

.....................Fuses, Checking the . 380

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 242..........................................Gasohol . 395.........................................Gasoline . 236

...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 71...........................................Gauge . 75

................Octane Requirement . 236........................Tank, Filling the . 237

................Gas Station Procedures . 237Gauges

...Engine Coolant Temperature . 75...............................................Fuel . 75

...............................Speedometer . 74.................................Tachometer . 74

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight.......................................Rating) . 272

GCWR (Gross Combined Weight.......................................Rating) . 272

............Gearshift Lever Positions . 254..............................Glass Cleaning . 356

......................................Glove Box . 100GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight

.......................................Rating) . 272

Index

G H

IV

CONTINUED

..................................................Keys . 90

.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 364.......................................Jack, Tire . 361

................................Jump Starting . 369

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 388Ignition

..............................................Keys . 90...........................................Switch . 92

............Timing Control System . 398........................Immobilizer System . 91

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 67

..................Individual Map Lights . 130.........................Infant Restraint . 27, 31

................................Infant Seats . 27, 31...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 332

.................................Inside Mirror . 115.............................Inspection, Tire . 334

........................Instrument Panel . 2, 66........Instrument Panel Brightness . 82

...........................Interior Cleaning . 354...............................Interior Lights . 128

........................................Introduction . i

.......................Label, Certification . 388.................Lane Change, Signaling . 83

..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 15, 46....................Light Control Switch . 128

.............................................Lights . 339....................Bulb Replacement . 341

.......................................Indicator . 61.......................................Interior . 128.........................................Parking . 79

..................................Turn Signal . 83.....................................Load Limit . 246

......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 92Locks

.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 92............................Fuel Fill Door . 237

..................................Glove Box . 100....................Lockout Prevention . 94

.................................Power Door . 93........................Low Coolant Level . 241.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 71

...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 68, 373...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 390

.........................................Luggage . 245

..................................Maintenance . 293...Owner Maintenance Checks . 305

.................................Record . 303-304......................Required Indicator . 76

..........................................Safety . 294.............................Schedule . 296-302

.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 68, 375............Manual Seat Adjustments . 103...........Memory, Driving Position . 118

...............................Meters, Gauges . 74...................Methanol in Gasoline . 395

........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 116.......................................Moonroof . 114

......................Closing Manually . 378...................................Operation . 114

Index

J

L

K

M

V

...................Neutral Gear Position . 255..................New Vehicle Break-in . 236

...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i...............Numbers, Identification . 388

...................Radiator Overheating . 371Radio/Cassette/CD Sound

.......................System . 145, 163, 183...............................Rear A/C Unit . 142

.......................Rear Compartment . 123..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 344

..........................Rear View Mirror . 115.................Rear Window Defogger . 88

.Rear Window Wiper and Washer . 87.....Reclining the Seat Backs . 102, 103

.........Reclining the Second Seats . 104..............Reclining the Third Seat . 104

.............................Reminder Lights . 67................Remote Audio Controls . 181

.......................Remote Transmitter . 95Replacement Information

.................Air Cleaner Element . 321.......................................Coolant . 313

..............Dust and Pollen Filter . 331................Engine Oil and Filter . 309

..........................................Fuses . 380................................Light Bulbs . 341

....................................Schedule . 296................................Spark Plugs . 323

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 236.........................................Odometer . 74

...............................Odometer, Trip . 75Oil

........................Change, How to . 309......................Change, When to . 296......................Checking Engine . 240..............Pressure Indicator . 68, 373

Selecting Proper Viscosity......................................Chart . 308

...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 93..Operation in Foreign Countries . 396

............................Outside Mirrors . 115....................Overheating, Engine . 371

.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 305.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 395

..............................Paint Touch-up . 353..............Panel Brightness Control . 82

........................Park Gear Position . 254...........................................Parking . 261

...............................Parking Brake . 117

.................................Parking Lights . 79..Parking Over Things that Burn . 399

.............................PGM-FI System . 398..................Polishing and Waxing . 353

..............Power Seat Adjustments . 101............Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 11

.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 19............................Protecting Adults . 12

...Additional Safety Precautions . 19.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 19

........................Protecting Children . 21.......................Protecting Infants . 31

.......Protecting Larger Children . 38.........Protecting Small Children . 35

Using Child Seats with.....................................Tethers . 42

.............................Using LATCH . 44

Index

N

O

P R

VI

＊

＊

CONTINUED

................................Timing Belt . 332...........................................Tires . 336

.............................Wiper Blades . 328Replacing Seat Belts After a

............................................Crash . 49...Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant . 241

..................Reverse Gear Position . 255................................Rotation, Tire . 335

..................................Safety Belts . 8, 46.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 404

.................................Safety Features . 7..........................................Air bags . 9

..................................Door Locks . 10..........................Head Restraints . 10

.......................................Seat Belts . 8.....................Seats & Seat-Backs . 10

.............Safety Labels, Location of . 63...............................Safety Messages . ii

.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 46...............Additional Information . 46

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 48

.....................................Cleaning . 355

......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 46................................Maintenance . 49

Reminder Light and................................Beeper . 46, 58

...................System Components . 46...............Use During Pregnancy . 19

...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 15...............................................Seats . 101

..........Folding the Second Seat . 106.............Folding the Third Seat . 107

........................Head Restraints . 105.......Reclining the Second Seat . 104

..........Reclining the Third Seat . 104......................Rear Seat Access . 106

...............................Serial Number . 388...........................Service Intervals . 296...........................Service Manual . 405

.........Service Station Procedures . 237Shifting the Automatic

.............................Transmission . 254.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 253

........................Shift Lock Release . 257Side Marker Lights, Bulb

.........................Replacement in . 342...............................Signaling Turns . 83

.....................................Snow Tires . 338

...................Solvent-type Cleaners . 352.................Sound System . 145,163, 183

Spare Tire......................................Inflating . 360

............................Specifications . 391....................................Spark Plugs . 323

....................Specifications Charts . 390................................Speed Control . 216...................................Speedometer . 74

..........SRS, Additional Information . 50...Additional Safety Precautions . 61..How the SRS Indicator Works . 56

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 51

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 55........................SRS Components . 50

..................................SRS Service . 60.............................SRS Indicator . 56, 68

....START (Ignition Key Position) . 93.......................Starting the Engine . 252

In Cold Weather at High..................................Altitude . 252

................With a Dead Battery . 369........Steam Coming from Engine . 371

Index

S

VII

Steering Wheel..................................Adjustment . 89

.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 92...Stereo Sound System . 145, 163, 183....................Storing Your Vehicle . 349

........................Sunglasses Holder . 124........................................Sun Visor . 124

Supplemental Restraint System......................................Servicing . 61

.........................SRS Indicator . 56, 68...................System Components . 50

..................................Synthetic Oil . 308.....................Underside, Cleaning . 357

Unexpected, Taking Care..........................................of the . 359

....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 392........................Unleaded Gasoline . 236

.....................Upholstery Cleaning . 354.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 310

................................Vanity Mirror . 125.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 246

......................Vehicle Dimensions . 390....Vehicle Identification Number . 388

.....................................Tachometer . 74......Taillights, Changing Bulbs in . 344

.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 359...................Tape Player . 151, 177, 191

Technical Descriptions......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 392.....Emissions Control Systems . 397

.....................Oxygenated Fuels . 395Three Way Catalytic

...............................Converter . 399.......................Temperature Gauge . 75

...................Tensioners, Seat Belts . 48............................Theft Protection . 182

..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 399....................................Timing Belt . 332....................................Tire Chains . 338

.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 361...........................Tire Information . 394

...............................................Tires . 332..............................Air Pressure . 332

...................................Balancing . 335.........................Checking Wear . 334..........................Compact Spare . 360

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 392......................................Inflation . 332

..................................Inspection . 334...................................Replacing . 336

......................................Rotating . 335...........................................Snow . 338

............................Specifications . 391................................Tire Chains . 338

Towing.....................................A Trailer . 271

................Emergency Wrecker . 385Your Vehicle Behind a

............................Motorhome . 283.............Transfer Assembly Fluid . 318

Transmission...............Checking Fluid Level . 317

...........................Fluid Selection . 317..............Identification Number . 388.............Shifting the Automatic . 253

.....................................Treadwear . 392

.......................................Trip Meter . 75....................................Turn Signals . 83

...................Tools, Tire Changing . 361

Index

T

U

V

VIII

＊

＊

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)....................................System . 266

........VSA System Indicator . 73, 267...VSA Activation Indicator . 73, 266

.........................VSA Off Switch . 267.............................Vehicle Storage . 349

.....................................Ventilation . 134.................................................VIN . 388

...............................Vinyl Cleaning . 355..................................Viscosity, Oil . 308..................................VTM-4 Lock . 259

.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii........Warning Labels, Location off . 63

..................Warranty Coverages . 403Washer, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 316............................Level Indicator . 71

.....................................Operation . 87.........................................Washing . 352

..................Waxing and Polishing . 353Wheels

...............Adjusting the Steering . 89............Alignment and Balance . 335

..........................Compact Spare . 360......................................Wrench . 363

Windows.....................................Cleaning . 356

................Operating the Power . 111...........................Rear, Defogger . 88

Windshield.....................................Cleaning . 356...................................Defroster . 140

.......................................Washers . 87Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 328.....................................Operation . 83

Rear Windshield Wiper and.....................................Washer . 87

....................................Worn Tires . 334.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 335

: U.S. and Canada only

Index

W

IX

Service Information Summary

Gasoline: Tire Pressure (measured cold):Power Steering Fluid:

Brake Fluid:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

Rear Differential Fluid:

Automatic Transmission Fluid:Transfer Assembly Fluid:

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

Front/Rear:

Compact Spare Tire:

Premium unleaded gasoline,pump octane number of 91 orhigher.

Honda VTM-4 Differential Fluid(see page ).

API Premium grade 5W-20detergent oil (see page ).

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid) preferred, ora DEXRON III ATF as atemporary replacement (see page

).

SAE 90 or SAE 80W-90 viscosityhypoid gear oil, API serviceclassified GL4 or GL5 only (seepage ).

307

320

319

318

317 319

19.21 US gal (72.7 )

2003 MDX Online Reference Owner’s Manual...

Documents

Transcript of 2003 MDX Online Reference Owner’s Manual...